Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
00 0110 - 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 00 0110
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
1.01 Division 00 -- Procurement and Contracting Requirements
A.
00 0110 - Table of Contents
SPECIFICATIONS
2.01 Division 02 -- Existing Conditions
A.
02 4100 - Demolition
2.02 Division 03 -- Concrete
A.
03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
B.
03 3511 - Concrete Floor Finishes
2.03 Division 04 -- Masonry
A.
04 2000 - Unit Masonry
B.
04 4301 - Stone Masonry Veneer
2.04 Division 05 -- Metals
A.
05 5000 - Metal Fabrications
2.05 Division 06 -- Wood, Plastics, and Composites
A.
06 1000 - Rough Carpentry
B.
06 1324 - Heavy Timber Framing
C.
06 1325 - Heavy Timber Trusses
D.
06 1500 - Wood Decking
E.
06 1753 - Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses
F.
06 1800 - Glued-Laminated Construction
G.
06 2000 - Finish Carpentry
2.06 Division 07 -- Thermal and Moisture Protection
A.
07 1113 - Bituminous Dampproofing
B.
07 1900 - Water Repellents
C.
07 2100 - Thermal Insulation
D.
07 2119 - Foamed-In-Place Insulation
E.
07 2500 - Weather Barriers
F.
07 3113 - Asphalt Shingles
G.
07 4646 - Fiber Cement Siding
H.
07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
I.
07 9005 - Joint Sealers
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
2.07 Division 08 -- Openings
A.
08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
B.
08 3100 - Access Doors and Panels
C.
08 7100 - Door Hardware
D.
08 8300 - Mirrors
2.08 Division 09 -- Finishes
A.
09 6700 - Fluid-Applied Flooring
B.
09 9000 - Painting and Coating
2.09 Division 10 -- Specialties
A.
10 1400 - Signage
B.
10 2113.19 - Plastic Toilet Compartments
C.
10 2800 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories
2.10 Division 12 -- Furnishings
A.
12 3600 - Countertops
2.11 Division 22 -- Plumbing
A.
22 0510 - General Plumbing Requirements
B.
22 0519 - Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping
C.
22 0553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
D.
22 0719 - Plumbing Piping Insulation
E.
22 1005 - Plumbing Piping
F.
22 1006 - Plumbing Piping Specialties
G.
22 3000 - Plumbing Equipment
H.
22 4000 - Plumbing Fixtures
2.12 Division 23 -- Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning (HVAC)
A.
23 0510 - General Electrical Requirements
B.
23 0513 - Motors for HVAC Equipment
C.
23 0515 - Enclosed Motor Controllers
D.
23 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment
E.
23 0553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment
F.
23 0593 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC
G.
23 0913 - Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC
H.
23 3100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings
I.
23 3300 - Air Duct Accessories
J.
23 3700 - Air Outlets and Inlets
00 0110 - 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
K. 23 8101 - Terminal Heat Transfer Units
2.13 Division 26 -- Electrical
A.
26 0510 - General Electrical Requirements
B.
26 0519 - Building Wire and Cable
C.
26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
D.
26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
E.
26 0534 - Conduit
F.
26 0537 - Boxes
G.
26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems
H.
26 2416 - Panelboards
I.
26 2701 - Electrical Service Entrance
J.
26 2726 - Wiring Devices
K.
26 2817 - Enclosed Circuit Breakers
L.
26 5100 - Interior Lighting
M. 26 5200 - Sensor Lighting Controls
2.14 Division 31 -- Earthwork
A.
31 3116 - Termite Control
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 0110 - 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
02 4100 - 1
DEMOLITION
SECTION 02 4100
DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Demolition of building elements for new construction.
B.
Selective demolition of building elements for alteration purposes.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
29 CFR 1926 - U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition.
B.
NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations;
2009.
PART 2 PRODUCTS -- NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent
structures and the public.
1. Obtain required permits.
2. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be
removed; do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of unstable
structures.
3. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices.
4. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and
occupants.
5. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit.
6. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do
not obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from
removal operations.
7. Obtain written permission from owners of adjacent properties when demolition equipment
will traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property.
B.
Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from Owner.
C.
Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed.
1. Provide bracing and shoring.
2. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures.
3. Stop work immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger.
D.
Minimize production of dust due to demolition operations; do not use water if that will result in
ice, flooding, sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution.
E.
If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations, stop work and notify Owner;
hazardous materials include regulated asbestos containing materials, lead, PCB's, and mercury.
3.02 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONS
A.
Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and
existing record documents only.
1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown.
2. Report discrepancies to Owner before disturbing existing installation.
Reed Bingham State Park
02 4100 - 2
Large Comfort Station Replacement
DEMOLITION
LDD-111034.00
3. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that would be
apparent upon examination prior to starting demolition.
B.
Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work.
1. Remove items indicated on drawings.
C.
Protect existing work to remain.
1. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work.
2. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work.
3. Patch as specified for patching new work.
3.03 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL
A.
Remove debris, junk, and trash from site.
B.
Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work.
C.
Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
03 3511 - 1
CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES
SECTION 03 3511
CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Surface treatments for concrete floors and slabs.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM D2370 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Organic Coatings; 1998
(Reapproved 2010).
B.
ASTM D2794 - Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid
Deformation (Impact); 1993 (Reapproved 2010).
C.
ASTM D4060 - Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the Taber
Abraser; 2010.
D.
ASTM D4541 - Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion
Testers; 2009.
1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordinate the work with concrete floor placement and concrete floor curing.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's published data on each finishing product, including information on
compatibility of different products and limitations.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials in manufacturer's sealed packaging, including application instructions.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain light level equivalent to a minimum 200 W light source at 8 feet above the floor surface
over each 20 foot square area of floor being finished.
B.
Do not finish floors until interior heating system is operational.
C.
Maintain ambient temperature of 50 degrees F minimum.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH APPLICATIONS
A.
Penetrating Clear Sealer:
1. Use at following locations: All interior locations without another finish specified.
B.
Polyaspartic Aliphatic Polyurea Coating:
2.02 COATINGS
A.
Polyaspartic Aliphatic Polyurea Coating: Fast-curing, two-component, chemical resistant,
penetrating resin for sealing concrete.
1. Finish Type: Clear.
2. Finish Texture: Manufacturer's standard low gloss.
3. Abrasion Resistance: 22 to 28, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4060.
Reed Bingham State Park
03 3511 - 2
Large Comfort Station Replacement
CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES
LDD-111034.00
4. Adhesion Pull-Off Resistance: 400 pounds per square inch, when tested in accordance
with ASTM D4541.
5. Tensile Strength: 4500 to 5000 pounds per square inch, when tested in accordance with
ASTM D2370.
6. Impact Resistance: Coating fails at 160 inch-pounds, when tested in accordance with
ASTM D2794.
7. Manufacturers:
a. HP Spartacote, Inc; "SpartaFlex" Clear Sealer System.
b. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com.
c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that floor surfaces are acceptable to receive the work of this section.
B.
Verify that flaws in concrete have been patched and joints filled with methods and materials
suitable for further finishes.
3.02 GENERAL
A.
Apply materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 COATING APPLICATION
A.
Verify that surface is free of previous coatings, sealers, curing compounds, water repellents,
laitance, efflorescence, fats, oils, grease, wax, soluble salts, residues from cleaning agents, and
other impediments to adhesion.
B.
Verify that water vapor emission from concrete and relative humidity in concrete are within limits
established by coating manufacturer.
C.
Protect adjacent non-coated areas from drips, overflow, and overspray; immediately remove
excess material.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
04 2000 - 1
UNIT MASONRY
SECTION 04 2000
UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Concrete Block.
B.
Mortar and Grout.
C.
Reinforcement and Anchorage.
D.
Lintels.
E.
Accessories.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ACI 530/530.1/ERTA - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures;
American Concrete Institute International; 2009.
B.
ASTM A82/A82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement;
2007.
C.
ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
D.
ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 2009b.
E.
ASTM A641/A641M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire;
2009a.
F.
ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2011.
G.
ASTM C91 - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement; 2005.
H.
ASTM C129 - Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2006.
I.
ASTM C140 - Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and
Related Units; 2011.
J.
ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 2004.
K.
ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2011.
L.
ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006.
M. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2010.
N.
ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2007.
O.
ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2010.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A.
Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows:
Reed Bingham State Park
04 2000 - 2
Large Comfort Station Replacement
UNIT MASONRY
LDD-111034.00
1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches and nominal depths as
indicated on the drawings for specific locations.
2. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C90, normal weight.
a. Hollow block, as indicated.
3. Non-Loadbearing Units: ASTM C129.
a. Both hollow and solid block.
b. Lightweight.
2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A.
Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, Type N.
B.
Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I.
C.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.
D.
Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144.
E.
Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404.
F.
Water: Clean and potable.
G.
Accelerating Admixture: Nonchloride type for use in cold weather.
H.
Moisture-Resistant Admixture: Water repellent compound designed to reduce capillarity.
2.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A.
Manufacturers of Joint Reinforcement and Anchors:
1. Blok-Lok Limited: www.blok-lok.com.
2. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc (including Dur-O-Wal brand): www.h-b.com.
3. WIRE-BOND: www.wirebond.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 40 (280) deformed billet bars; galvanized.
C.
Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; ASTM A 82/A 82M steel wire, mill galvanized to
ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3; 0.1483 inch side rods with 0.1483 inch cross rods; width as
required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage on each
exposure.
D.
Adjustable Multiple Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type with adjustable ties or tabs spaced
at 16 in on center ASTM A 82/A 82M steel wire, hot dip galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A
153/153M, Class B; 0.1875 inch side rods with 0.1483 inch cross rods and adjustable
components of 0.1875 inch wire; width of components as required to provide not more than 1
inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage from each masonry face.
1. Vertical adjustment: Not less than 2 inches.
E.
Flexible Anchors: 2-piece anchors that permit differential movement between masonry and
building frame, sized to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar
coverage from masonry face.
F.
Two-Piece Wall Ties: Formed steel wire, 0.1875 inch thick, adjustable, eye and pintle type, hot
dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B, sized to provide not more than 1 inch and not
less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage from masonry face and to allow vertical adjustment of up
to 1-1/4 in.
2.04 FLASHINGS
A.
Metal Flashing Materials: Stainless Steel, as specified in Section 07 6200.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
2.05 ACCESSORIES
04 2000 - 3
UNIT MASONRY
A.
Preformed Control Joints: Rubber material. Provide with corner and tee accessories, fused
joints.
B.
Joint Filler: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding; 3/8
inch wide x by maximum lengths available.
C.
Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.
2.06 LINTELS
A.
Option to use Precast Concrete Lintels or Concrete Masonry Unit U-block with reinforcing and
concrete. Contractor to consult Structural drawings and Specifications for performance
requirements.
2.07 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A.
Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, using the Proportion Specification.
1. Masonry below grade and in contact with earth: Type S.
2. Exterior, loadbearing masonry: Type N.
3. Exterior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type N.
4. Interior, loadbearing masonry: Type N.
5. Interior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type O.
B.
Grout: ASTM C476. Consistency required to fill completely volumes indicated for grouting; fine
grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches or less; coarse grout for spaces
with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches.
C.
Admixtures: Add to mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate and in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly.
D.
Mixing: Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced standards.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry.
B.
Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located.
C.
Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections.
B.
Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building
structure provides permanent bracing.
3.03 COLD AND HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with requirements of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA or applicable building code, whichever is more
stringent.
3.04 COURSING
A.
Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.
B.
Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform
thickness.
C.
Concrete Masonry Units:
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
1. Bond: Running.
2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches.
3. Mortar Joints: Concave.
04 2000 - 4
UNIT MASONRY
3.05 PLACING AND BONDING
A.
Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other
work.
B.
Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.
C.
Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted.
D.
Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.
E.
Remove excess mortar with water repellent admixture promptly. Do not use acids, sandblasting
or high pressure cleaning methods.
F.
Interlock intersections and external corners.
G.
Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must
be made, remove mortar and replace.
H.
Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped
edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.
I.
Cut mortar joints flush where cement parging is required.
3.06 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - GENERAL
A.
Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or specified under specific wall type, install horizontal
joint reinforcement 16 inches on center.
B.
Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below
openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening.
C.
Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls.
D.
Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches.
E.
Reinforce joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches on center.
F.
Fasten anchors to structural framing and embed in masonry joints as masonry is laid. Unless
otherwise indicated on drawings or closer spacing is indicated under specific wall type, space
anchors at maximum of 36 inches horizontally and 24 inches vertically.
3.07 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - SINGLE WYTHE MASONRY
A.
Install horizontal joint reinforcement 8 inches on center.
B.
Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below
openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening.
C.
Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls.
D.
Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches.
E.
Reinforce joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches on center.
3.08 MASONRY FLASHINGS
A.
Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all
locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
3.09 LINTELS
04 2000 - 5
UNIT MASONRY
A.
Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings where steel or precast concrete lintels are
not scheduled.
1. Openings to 42 inches: Place two, No. 3 reinforcing bars 1 inch from bottom web.
2. Openings from 42 inches to 78 inches: Place two, No. 5 reinforcing bars 1 inch from
bottom web.
3. Openings over 78 inches: Reinforce openings as detailed.
4. Do not splice reinforcing bars.
5. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of
dimensioned position.
6. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.
7. Allow masonry lintels to attain specified strength before removing temporary supports.
B.
Maintain minimum 12 inch bearing on each side of opening.
3.10 GROUTED COMPONENTS
A.
Lap splices minimum 24 bar diameters.
B.
Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of
dimensioned position.
C.
Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.
3.11 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints.
B.
Form control joint with a sheet building paper bond breaker fitted to one side of the hollow
contour end of the block unit. Fill the resultant core with grout fill. Rake joint at exposed unit
faces for placement of backer rod and sealant.
C.
Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D.
Size control joint in accordance with Section 07 9005 for sealant performance.
3.12 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch.
B.
Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or more.
C.
Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or
more.
D.
Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft and 1/4 inch in 10 ft; 1/2 inch in 30 ft.
E.
Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft.
F.
Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch.
3.13 CUTTING AND FITTING
A.
Cut and fit for pipes, conduit, and sleeves. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide
correct size, shape, and location.
B.
Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or
strength of masonry work may be impaired.
3.14 PARGING
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
A. Dampen masonry walls prior to parging.
04 2000 - 6
UNIT MASONRY
B.
Scarify each parging coat to ensure full bond to subsequent coat.
C.
Parge masonry walls in two uniform coats of mortar to a total thickness of 3/4 inch.
D.
Steel trowel surface smooth and flat with a maximum surface variation of 1/8 inch per foot.
E.
Strike top edge of parging at 45 degrees.
3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01
4000.
B.
Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: Test each variety of concrete unit masonry in accordance with
ASTM C140 for conformance to requirements of this specification.
3.16 CLEANING
A.
Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings.
B.
Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
C.
Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
D.
Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
04 4301 - 1
STONE MASONRY VENEER
SECTION 04 4301
STONE MASONRY VENEER
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Field stone veneer at exterior walls.
B.
Metal anchors and accessories.
C.
Setting mortar.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ACI 530/530.1/ERTA - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures;
American Concrete Institute International; 2009.
B.
ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2010.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on stone units, mortar, and reinforcement.
C.
Samples: Submit two stone samples illustrating color range, texture, and markings.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Stone Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating cut stone with minimum ten
years of documented experience.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type required by this
section, with minimum five years of documented experience.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect stone from discoloration during storage on site.
B.
Provide ventilation to prevent condensation from forming on stone.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Cold Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA or applicable
building code, whichever is more stringent.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Stone Masonry Reinforcement and Accessories
1. Blok-Lok Limited: www.blok-lok.com.
2. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc (including Dur-O-Wal brand): www.h-b.com.
3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 STONE
2.03 MORTAR
A.
Setting Mortar: ASTM C270, Type S, using the Proportion Method.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Flashings:Type as specified in Section 07 6200.
Reed Bingham State Park
04 4301 - 2
Large Comfort Station Replacement
STONE MASONRY VENEER
LDD-111034.00
B. Cleaning Solution: Type that will not harm stone, joint materials, or adjacent surfaces.
2.05 STONE FABRICATION
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that support work and site conditions are ready to receive work of this section.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Establish lines, levels, and coursing. Protect from disturbance.
B.
Clean stone prior to erection. Do not use wire brushes or implements that mark or damage
exposed surfaces.
C.
Clean sawn surfaces of rust stains and iron particles.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install flashings of longest practical length and seal watertight to back-up. Lap end joints
minimum 6 inches and seal watertight.
B.
Size stone units to fit opening dimensions and perimeter conditions.
C.
Wet absorptive stone in preparation for placement to minimize moisture suction from mortar.
D.
Arrange stone pattern to provide color uniformity and minimize visual variations, and provide a
uniform blend of stone unit sizes.
E.
Arrange stone coursing in ashlar bond with consistent joint width.
F.
Set stone in full mortar setting bed to fully support stone over bearing surface. Use setting
buttons or shims to maintain correct joint width.
3.04 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
3.05 CLEANING
A.
Remove excess mortar as work progresses, and upon completion of work.
B.
Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
C.
Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
3.06 PROTECTION
A.
During temporary storage on site, at the end of working day, and during rainy weather, cover
stone work exposed to weather with non-staining waterproof coverings, securely anchored.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
05 5000 - 1
METAL FABRICATIONS
SECTION 05 5000
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Shop fabricated steel items.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products; 2009.
B.
ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
C.
ASTM A283/A283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon
Steel Plates; 2003 (Reapproved 2007).
D.
ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi
Minimum Tensile Strength; 2009a.
E.
ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Tensile
Strength (Metric); 2009.
F.
SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004).
G.
SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for
Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size
and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details
where applicable.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS - STEEL
A.
Plates: ASTM A283.
B.
Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 (ASTM A325M), Type 1, galvanized to ASTM
A153/A153M where connecting galvanized components.
C.
Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
D.
Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with
VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.02 FABRICATION
A.
Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.
B.
Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
C.
Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt
tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
05 5000 - 2
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
METAL FABRICATIONS
LDD-111034.00
D. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related
components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted
otherwise.
2.03 FINISHES - STEEL
A.
Prime paint all steel items.
1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete or masonry.
B.
Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.
C.
Prime Painting: Two coats.
D.
Galvanizing of Non-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M
requirements.
2.04 FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A.
Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements.
B.
Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch.
C.
Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch.
D.
Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches.
E.
Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
B.
Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until
completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.
C.
Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.
D.
After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except
surfaces to be in contact with concrete.
3.02 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative.
B.
Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.
C.
Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
06 1000 - 1
ROUGH CARPENTRY
SECTION 06 1000
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Preservative treated wood materials.
B.
Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
B.
AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood
Protection Association; 2010.
C.
PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2007.
D.
PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology
(Department of Commerce); 2005.
E.
SPIB (GR) - Grading Rules; Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc.; 2002.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent
deformation and to allow air circulation.
1.05 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies.
1. Species: Southern Pine, unless otherwise indicated.
2. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no
grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the
specified requirements.
3. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review,
American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for
the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS
A.
Grading Agency: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc. (SPIB).
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
B. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.
C.
Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.
D.
Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring:
1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade.
2. Boards: Standard or No. 3.
06 1000 - 2
ROUGH CARPENTRY
2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A.
Other Applications:
1. Plywood Concealed From View But Located Within Exterior Enclosure: PS 1, C-C Plugged
or better, Exterior grade.
2. Plywood Exposed to View But Not Exposed to Weather: PS 1, A-D, or better.
3. Other Locations: PS 1, C-D Plugged or better.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Fasteners and Anchors:
1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity
and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.
2.05 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT
A.
Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System
for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific
applications.
1. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an
ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with
AWPA standards.
B.
Preservative Treatment:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Arch Wood Protection, Inc: www.wolmanizedwood.com.
b. Chemical Specialties, Inc: www.treatedwood.com.
c. Osmose, Inc: www.osmose.com.
2. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category
UC3B, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft retention.
a. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
b. Treat lumber exposed to weather.
c. Treat lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing.
d. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A.
Select material sizes to minimize waste.
B.
Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory
components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking.
C.
Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately
after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants.
3.02 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS
A.
Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
Reed Bingham State Park
06 1000 - 3
Large Comfort Station Replacement
ROUGH CARPENTRY
LDD-111034.00
B. In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fireblocking as required
by applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top
story and roof/attic space; other material acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu of
solid wood blocking.
C.
In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings for
anchorage of frames, securely attached to stud framing.
D.
In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items,
unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is
explicitly indicated.
E.
Where ceiling-mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports above
ceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated.
F.
Specifically, provide the following non-structural framing and blocking:
1. Wall brackets.
2. Handrails.
3. Grab bars.
4. Towel and bath accessories.
5. Wall-mounted door stops.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.
Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum.
B.
Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet
maximum.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Waste Disposal: Comply with the requirements of Section 01 7419.
1. Comply with applicable regulations.
2. Do not burn scrap on project site.
3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated.
4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation
facilities or “waste-to-energy” facilities.
B.
Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill.
C.
Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
06 1324 - 1
HEAVY TIMBER FRAMING
SECTION 06 1324
HEAVY TIMBER FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Heavy structural timber for posts and rafters.
B.
Connection hardware.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AITC 108 - Standard for Heavy Timber Construction; American Institute of Timber Construction;
1993.
B.
ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products; 2009.
C.
ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
D.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.
E.
SPIB (GR) - Grading Rules; Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc.; 2002.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, wood species and grades, component profiles, drilled
holes, fasteners, connectors, erection details and sequence.
1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols. Indicate net weld
lengths.
C.
Product Data: Submit data on proprietary connection devices.
D.
Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within
the previous 12 months.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by American Lumber Standards Committee.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture of heavy timber framing,
certified by American Institute of Timber Construction, with three years minimum experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WOOD MATERIALS
A.
Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
B.
Lumber Grading Rules: SPIB (GR).
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A.
Connectors: Type weldable steel.
1. Galvanize connectors in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M.
B.
Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, and Screws, Preservative-Treated Wood: Medium carbon steel,
galvanized coating per ASTM A153/A153M; size and type to suit application.
2.03 FABRICATION
Reed Bingham State Park
06 1324 - 2
Large Comfort Station Replacement
HEAVY TIMBER FRAMING
LDD-111034.00
A. Fabricate components in accordance with AITC 108, with joints neatly fitted, welded, and ground
smooth.
B.
Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Ensure that steel support fabrications are installed in correct locations and anchored securely.
3.02 ERECTION
A.
Set structural members level and plumb, in correct position.
B.
Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure
safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent
bracing.
C.
Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Lyman Davidson Dooley, Inc..
D.
After erection, touch-up galvanized surfaces with primer.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
06 1325 - 1
HEAVY TIMBER TRUSSES
SECTION 06 1325
HEAVY TIMBER TRUSSES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Heavy structural timber trusses.
B.
Bridging, bracing, and anchorage.
C.
Connection hardware.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AITC 108 - Standard For Heavy Timber Construction; American Institute of Timber Construction;
1993.
B.
ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.
C.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.
D.
SPIB (GR) - Grading Rules; Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc.; 2002.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01 3000.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate framing system, sizes and spacing of trusses, loads and truss
cambers. Submit design calculations.
1. Indicate species and wood grades, component profiles, bearing and anchor details, bridging
and bracing, framed openings, drilled holes, fasteners, connectors, erection details and
sequence, and field splices.
2. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS D1.1 welding symbols. Indicate net weld
lengths.
C.
Product Data: Provide data on proprietary connection devices and on wood preservative
materials.
1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to applicable code for loads, seismic zoning, other governing load criteria, and fire
retardant criteria.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01 6000.
B.
Store trusses in vertical position resting on bearing points and braced to prevent damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 HEAVY TIMBER TRUSSES
A.
Trusses and Components: Fabricated in accordance with AITC 108, joints neatly fitted and
accurately spaced.
1. Surface Texture of Timber: Smooth surface; on four sides.
2. Connectors: Prime except where cast in concrete or in contact with cementitious materials.
3. Supporting Roofs: Design for live and dead load as noted in Structural Drawings with
deflection limited to 1/240 of span.
2.02 WOOD MATERIALS
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
B.
06 1325 - 2
HEAVY TIMBER TRUSSES
Lumber Grading Rules: SPIB (GR).
2.03 CONNECTOR MATERIALS
A.
Shop prime all connectors except leave surfaces bare where intended to be in contact with
concrete or cementitious materials.
B.
Steel Connector Plates: Hot-dipped galvanized, ASTM A653/A653M, SS Grade 33/230, with
G185/Z550 coating; size and thickness as indicated.
C.
Steel Split Rings: ASTM A666, Type 304 stainless steel; size and thickness as indicated.
D.
Truss Bridging: Type, size and spacing recommended by truss manufacturer.
E.
Bearing Plates: Stainless steel.
F.
Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Stainless steel; size and type to suit application.
G.
Metal Primer: Galvanizing type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B.
Verify that supports and openings are ready to receive trusses.
C.
Verify sufficient bearing surface area.
3.02 ERECTION
A.
Install trusses in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install trusses level and plumb, in correct position.
C.
Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure
plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.
D.
Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Lyman Davidson Dooley, Inc..
E.
Install permanent bridging, bracing, and anchors.
F.
Coordinate installation of decking.
G.
After erection, touch up primed surfaces with primer consistent with shop coat.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.
Framing Members: 1/4 inch maximum from true position.
B.
Maximum Gap in Tension Member Joints: 1/16 inch.
C.
Maximum Gap in Compression Member Joints: 1/32 inch.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
06 1500 - 1
WOOD DECKING
SECTION 06 1500
WOOD DECKING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Softwood lumber structural wood decking.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AITC 112 - Standard for Tongue-and-Groove Heavy Timber Roof Decking; American Institute of
Timber Construction; 1993, and errata.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials.
C.
Samples of Wood Deck Exposed To View: Submit two samples, 12 inches long in size
illustrating wood grain, stain, and finish.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Designer Qualifications: Design decking under direct supervision of a Professional Structural
Engineer experienced in design of work of this type and licensed in Georgia.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years of documented experience and certified by AITC.
C.
Installer: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section with
minimum three years of experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WOOD MATERIALS
A.
Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
B.
Marking: Mark each piece with producer's stamp indicating compliance with specified
requirements; for pieces exposed to view in completed construction, submit manufacturer's
certificate certifying that products conform to specified requirements in lieu of grade stamping.
C.
Lumber Decking: Fabricated to AITC 112.
1. Species: Southern Pine, graded under SPIB rules as AITC Select quality.
2. Size: 2 by 6 inches, nominal.
3. Pattern: AITC standard beveled V-joint with single tongue and groove.
4. Moisture Content: 19 percent, maximum.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A.
Fasteners and Anchors:
1. Fastener Type and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel for high humidity and
preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that support framing is ready to receive decking.
3.02 INSTALLATION - BOARD DECKING
Reed Bingham State Park
06 1500 - 2
Large Comfort Station Replacement
WOOD DECKING
LDD-111034.00
A. Install decking perpendicular to framing members, with ends staggered over firm bearing. On
sloped surfaces, lay decking with tongue upward.
B.
Engage decking tongue and groove edges.
C.
Secure with fasteners. Side spike planks together, through pre-drilled holes.
D.
Maintain decking joint space of 1/16 inch maximum.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.
Surface Flatness of Decking Without Load: 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/2 inch in 30 feet
maximum.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
06 1753 - 1
SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
SECTION 06 1753
SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Shop fabricated wood trusses for roof framing.
B.
Bridging, bracing, and anchorage.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.
B.
SPIB (GR) - Grading Rules; Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc.; 2002.
C.
TPI 1 - National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction; Truss
Plate Institute; 2002 and errata (ANSI/TPI 1).
D.
TPI DSB-89 - Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate
Connected Wood Trusses; Truss Plate Institute; 1989.
E.
BCSI 1 - Building Component Safety Information Booklet: The Guide to Good Practice for
Handling, Installing & Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses; joint publication of the
Truss Plate Institute and the Wood Trust Council of America; 2008.
1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with applicable code for structural loading criteria.
B.
Design Roof Live and Dead Load: See Structural drawings for loads with deflection limited to
1/240 of span.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on plate connectors, bearing plates, and metal
bracing components.
C.
Shop Drawings: Show truss configurations, sizes, spacing, size and type of plate connectors,
cambers, framed openings, bearing and anchor details, and bridging and bracing.
1. Include identification of engineering software used for design.
2. Provide shop drawings stamped or sealed by design engineer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Truss Design, Fabrication, and Installation: In accordance with TPI 1, TPI DSB-89, and BCSI 1.
B.
Designer Qualifications: Perform design by or under direct supervision of a Professional
Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in Georgia.
C.
Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this
section with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Handle and erect trusses in accordance with BCSI 1.
B.
Store trusses in vertical position resting on bearing ends.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
PART 2 PRODUCTS
06 1753 - 2
SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Truss Plate Connectors:
1. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc: www.alpeng.com.
2. MiTek Industries, Inc: www.mii.com.
3. Truswal Systems: www.truswal.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Lumber:
1. Species: Southern Pine.
2. Grade: SPIB (GR), Grade Select Structural.
3. Moisture Content: Between 7 and 9 percent.
4. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
B.
Steel Connectors: ASTM A666, Type 304 stainless steel; die stamped with integral teeth;
thickness as required.
C.
Truss Bridging: Type, size and spacing recommended by truss manufacturer.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A.
Wood Blocking, Bridging, Plates, and Miscellaneous Framing: As specified in Section 06 1000.
B.
Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel, type to suit application.
C.
Bearing Plates: Hot-dip galvanized steel.
2.04 FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate trusses to achieve structural requirements specified.
B.
Brace wood trusses in accordance with TPI DSB-89 and BCSI 1.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B.
Verify that supports and openings are ready to receive trusses.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Coordinate placement of bearing items.
3.03 ERECTION
A.
Install trusses in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and TPI DSB-89 and BCSI 1.
B.
Set members level and plumb, in correct position.
C.
Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure
plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.
D.
Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Lyman Davidson Dooley, Inc..
E.
Install permanent bridging and bracing.
F.
After erection, touch-up primed surfaces with primer consistent with shop coat.
3.04 TOLERANCES
Reed Bingham State Park
06 1753 - 3
Large Comfort Station Replacement
SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
LDD-111034.00
A. Framing Members: 1/2 inch maximum, from true position.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
06 1800 - 1
GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 06 1800
GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Glue laminated wood beams and rafters/purlins.
B.
Steel hardware and attachment brackets.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AITC A190.1 - American National Standard for Wood Products - Structural Glued Laminated
Timber; American Institute of Timber Construction; 2007.
B.
ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008.
C.
ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products; 2009.
D.
ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi
Minimum Tensile Strength; 2009a.
E.
ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Tensile
Strength (Metric); 2009.
F.
ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts; 2007a.
G.
ASTM A563M - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts [Metric]; 2007.
H.
ASTM D2559 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Structural Laminated Wood Products for
Use Under Exterior (Wet Use) Exposure Conditions; 2010a.
I.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.
J.
SPIB (GR) - Grading Rules; Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc.; 2002.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials, application technique and
resultant performance information.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate framing system, sizes and spacing of members, loads and cambers,
bearing and anchor details, bridging and bracing, framed openings.
1. Submit design calculations.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Designer Qualifications: Design structural members under direct supervision of a Professional
Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in Georgia.
B.
Manufacturer/Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture of glue laminated
structural units with three years of documented experience, and certified by AITC in accordance
with AITC A190.1.
C.
Erector Qualifications: Company specializing in erection of products of the type specified, with
three years of experience.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
06 1800 - 2
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION
LDD-111034.00
A. Protect members to AITC requirements for individually wrapped.
B.
Leave individual wrapping in place until finishing occurs.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Glued-Laminated Structural Units:
1. Sentinel Structures, Inc: www.sentinelstructures.com.
2. Unit Structures: www.unitstructures.com.
3. Western Wood Structures, Inc: www.westernwoodstructures.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 GLUED-LAMINATED UNITS
A.
Glued-Laminated Units: Fabricate in accordance with AITC 117 Architectural grade.
1. Verify dimensions and site conditions prior to fabrication.
2. Cut and fit members accurately to length to achieve tight joint fit.
3. Fabricate member with camber built in.
4. Do not splice or join members in locations other than those indicated without permission.
5. Fabricate steel hardware and connections with joints neatly fitted, welded, and ground
smooth.
6. Welding: Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.
7. After end trimming, seal with penetrating sealer in accordance with AITC requirements.
B.
Performance Criteria:
1. Conform to applicable code for loads, seismic zoning, and other load criteria.
2.03 MATERIALS
A.
Lumber: Softwood lumber conforming to SPIB grading rules with 12 percent maximum moisture
content before fabrication. Design for the values noted in the Structural Drawings.
1. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
B.
Steel Connections and Brackets: ASTM A36/A36M weldable quality, galvanize per ASTM
A123/A123M.
C.
Hardware: ASTM A325 (ASTM A325M) Type 1 high strength heavy hex bolts and ASTM A563
(ASTM A563M) nuts, stainless steel, matching washers.
D.
Laminating Adhesive: Tested for wet/exterior service in accordance with ASTM D2559.
E.
Bearing Plate Anchors: Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or
concrete.
2.04 FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate glue laminated structural members in accordance with AITC Industrial grade.
B.
Welding: Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.
C.
Verify dimensions and site conditions prior to fabrication.
D.
Cut and fit members accurately to length to achieve tight joint fit.
E.
Fabricate member with camber built in.
F.
Do not splice or join members in locations other than those indicated without permission.
G.
Fabricate steel hardware and connections with joints neatly fitted, welded, and ground smooth.
H.
After end trimming, seal with penetrating sealer in accordance with AITC requirements.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
PART 3 EXECUTION
06 1800 - 3
GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that supports are ready to receive units.
B.
Verify sufficient end bearing area.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Coordinate placement of bearing items.
3.03 ERECTION
A.
Lift members using protective straps to prevent visible damage.
B.
Set structural members level and plumb, in correct positions or sloped where indicated.
C.
Provide temporary bracing and anchorage to hold members in place until permanently secured.
D.
Fit members together accurately without trimming, cutting, splicing, or other unauthorized
modification.
E.
Swab and seal the interior wood surfaces of field drilled holes in members with primer.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A.
Framing Members: 1/2 inch maximum from true position.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
06 2000 - 1
FINISH CARPENTRY
SECTION 06 2000
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Finish carpentry items.
B.
Wood casings and moldings.
C.
Hardware and attachment accessories.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2007.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and
accessories.
1. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this
section with minimum five years of documented experience.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect work from moisture damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS
A.
Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by
AWI//AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for Premium Grade.
B.
Interior Woodwork Items:
1. Moldings, Bases, Casings, and Miscellaneous Trim: Clear white pine; prepare for paint
finish.
2. Suspended Wood Ceiling System: "FR-S" treated.
2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS
A.
Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
2.03 LUMBER MATERIALS
A.
Softwood Lumber: Southern Pine species, finish sawn, maximum moisture content of 6 percent;
with vertical grain,.
2.04 SHEET MATERIALS
A.
Softwood Plywood Exposed to View: Face species Southern Pine, plain sawn, medium density
fiberboard core; PS 1 Grade A-B; glue type as recommended for application.
2.05 FASTENINGS
A.
Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application;galvanized finish in concealed locations
andgalvanized finish in exposed locations.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
2.06 ACCESSORIES
A.
06 2000 - 2
FINISH CARPENTRY
Wood Filler: Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish color.
2.07 FABRICATION
A.
Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings.
B.
When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting.
Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
B.
Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and
ready to receive this work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards
requirements for grade indicated.
B.
Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.
C.
Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use
additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch.
B.
Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
07 1113 - 1
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
SECTION 07 1113
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Bituminous dampproofing.
B.
Protection boards.
C.
Drainage panels.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM D41 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and
Waterproofing; 2011.
B.
ASTM D1227 - Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Used as a Protective Coating for
Roofing; 1995 (Reapproved 2007).
C.
ASTM D2822 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Containing; 2005.
D.
ASTM D4479 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Coatings - Asbestos-Free; 2007.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide properties of primer, bitumen, and mastics.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions
requiring special attention.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum five years experience.
1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F for 24 hours before and during application
until dampproofing has cured.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Karnak Chemical Corp: www.karnakcorp.com.
2. Mar-Flex Systems, Inc: www.mar-flex.com.
3. Seaboard Asphalt Products Company: www.seaboardasphalt.com.
4. W.R. Meadows, Inc: www.wrmeadows.com.
5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 DAMPPROOFING PRODUCTS
A.
Bituminous Dampproofing: Cold-applied, spray-grade; asphalt base, volatile petroleum solvents,
and other content, suitable for application by spray, brush, roller, or squeegee; asbestos-free;
suitable for application on vertical and horizontal surfaces.
1. Composition: ASTM D4479 Type I, minimum.
2. VOC Content: Not more than permitted by local, State, and federal regulations.
3. Applied Thickness: 1/16 inch, minimum, wet film.
Reed Bingham State Park
07 1113 - 2
Large Comfort Station Replacement
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
LDD-111034.00
B. Primers, Mastics, and Related Materials: Type as recommended by dampproofing manufacturer.
2.03 COLD ASPHALTIC MATERIALS
A.
Bitumen: Emulsified asphalt, ASTM D1227; with fiber reinforcement other than asbestos (Type
II).
B.
Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41, compatible with substrate.
C.
Sealing Mastic: Asphalt roof cement, ASTM D2822, Type I.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Drainage Panel: 1/4 inch thick formed plastic, hollowed sandwich.
B.
Protection Board: Rigid insulation specified in Section 07 2100.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify substrate surfaces are durable, free of matter detrimental to adhesion or application of
dampproofing system.
C.
Verify that items that penetrate surfaces to receive dampproofing are securely installed.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive dampproofing.
B.
Clean and prepare surfaces to receive dampproofing in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
C.
Do not apply dampproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer.
D.
Apply mastic to seal penetrations, small cracks, or minor honeycomb in substrate.
3.03 APPLICATION
A.
Foundation Walls: Apply two coats of asphalt dampproofing.
B.
Prime surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Apply bitumen with mop.
D.
Seal items projecting through dampproofing surface with mastic. Seal watertight.
E.
Place drainage panel directly over dampproofing, butt joints, place to encourage drainage
downward.
F.
Place protection board over drainage panel, butt joints, and adhere with mastic.
G.
Scribe and cut boards around projections, penetrations, and interruptions.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
07 1900 - 1
WATER REPELLENTS
SECTION 07 1900
WATER REPELLENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Water repellents applied to exterior stone surfaces.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM D3960 - Standard Practice for Determining Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content of
Paints and Related Coatings; 2005.
B.
ASTM D5095 - Standard Test Method for Determination of the Nonvolatile Content in Silanes,
Siloxanes, and Silane-Siloxane Blends Used in Masonry Water Repellent Treatments; 1991
(Reapproved 2007).
1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a meeting at least one week prior to starting work; require
attendance of affected installers; invite Lyman Davidson Dooley, Inc. and Owner.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide product description.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring
special attention; cautionary procedures required during application.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum three years experience.
C.
Owner reserves the right to provide continuous independent inspection of surface preparation
and application of water repellent.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Protect liquid materials from freezing.
B.
Do not apply water repellent when ambient temperature is lower than 50 degrees F or higher than
100 degrees F.
C.
Do not apply water repellents when wind velocity is higher than 10 mph.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Silane/Siloxane Water Repellents:
1. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
2. PROSOCO, Inc: www.prosoco.com.
3. Advanced Chemical Technologies: www.advchemtech.com
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS
Reed Bingham State Park
07 1900 - 2
Large Comfort Station Replacement
WATER REPELLENTS
LDD-111034.00
A. Water Repellent: Non-glossy, colorless, penetrating, water-vapor-permeable, non-yellowing
sealer, that dries invisibly leaving appearance of substrate unchanged.
1. Applications: Vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces.
2. Number of Coats: Two.
3. VOC Content: Less than 600 g/L, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3690 or D 5095.
4. Moisture Absorption When Applied to Masonry: 5 percent, maximum, when tested in
accordance with ASTM C140 using masonry sample completely coated with water repellent.
5. Maintains dry appearance when wetted.
6. Products: Siloxane, silane, or blend that reacts chemically with concrete and masonry;
minimum 90 percent nonvolatile content.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify joint sealants are installed and cured.
C.
Verify surfaces to be coated are dry, clean, and free of efflorescence, oil, or other matter
detrimental to application of water repellent.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Protection of Adjacent Work:
1. Protect adjacent landscaping, property, and vehicles from drips and overspray.
2. Protect adjacent surfaces not intended to receive water repellent.
B.
Prepare surfaces to be coated as recommended by water repellent manufacturer for best results.
C.
Do not start work until masonry mortar substrate is cured a minimum of 60 days.
D.
Remove loose particles and foreign matter.
E.
Remove oil and foreign substances with a chemical solvent that will not affect water repellent.
F.
Scrub and rinse surfaces with water and let dry.
G.
Allow surfaces to dry completely to degree recommended by water repellent manufacturer before
starting coating work.
3.03 APPLICATION
A.
Apply water repellent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using procedures and
application methods recommended as producing the best results.
B.
Apply two coats, minimum.
C.
Remove water repellent from unintended surfaces immediately by a method instructed by water
repellent manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
07 2100 - 1
THERMAL INSULATION
SECTION 07 2100
THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Board insulation at perimeter foundation wall and underside of floor slabs.
B.
Batt insulation in exterior wall, ceiling, and roof construction.
C.
Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and crevices in exterior wall
and roof.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2010a.
B.
ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light
Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2006.
C.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2010b.
D.
ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750
Degrees C; 2011.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product
limitations.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include information on special environmental conditions
required for installation and installation techniques.
1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to
successful installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPLICATIONS
A.
Insulation Under Concrete Slabs: Extruded polystyrene board.
B.
Insulation at Perimeter of Foundation: Extruded polystyrene board.
C.
Insulation in Wood Framed Walls: Batt insulation with integral vapor retarder.
D.
Insulation in Wood Framed Ceiling Structure: Batt insulation with integral vapor retarder.
2.02 FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C578, Type X; Extruded polystyrene board with
either natural skin or cut cell surfaces; with the following characteristics:
1. Flame Spread Index: 75 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch.
4. Board Thickness: 1-1/2 inches.
5. Board Edges: Square.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
6. Thermal Conductivity (k factor) at 25 degrees F: 0.18.
7. Compressive Resistance: 15 psi.
8. Board Density: 1.3 lb/cu ft.
9. Water Absorption, maximum: 0.3 percent, volume.
10. Manufacturers:
a. Dow Chemical Co: www.dow.com.
b. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
c. Pactiv Building Products: greenguard.pactiv.com.
11. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
07 2100 - 2
THERMAL INSULATION
2.03 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665;
friction fit.
1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136, except for
facing, if any.
4. Formaldehyde Content: Zero.
5. Thermal Resistance: R of 19 for walls and R of 30 for roofs.
6. Thickness: To be determined by R-value.
7. Facing: Aluminum foil, flame spread 25 rated; one side.
8. Manufacturers:
a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
b. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.
c. Knauf Insulation GmbH: www.knaufinsulation.us.
d. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
9. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Tape: Bright aluminum self-adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inch wide.
B.
Nails or Staples: Steel wire; galvanized; type and size to suit application.
C.
Wire Mesh: Galvanized steel, hexagonal wire mesh.
D.
Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are
ready to receive insulation and adhesive.
B.
Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials or
substances that may impede adhesive bond.
3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION AT FOUNDATION PERIMETER
A.
Adhere a 6 inch wide strip of polyethylene sheet over construction, control, and expansion joints
with double beads of adhesive each side of joint.
1. Tape seal joints.
2. Extend sheet full height of joint.
B.
Apply adhesive to back of boards:
1. Full bed 1/8 inch thick.
C.
Install boards horizontally on foundation perimeter.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
1. Place boards to maximize adhesive contact.
2. Install in running bond pattern.
3. Butt edges and ends tightly to adjacent boards and to protrusions.
07 2100 - 3
THERMAL INSULATION
D.
Extend boards over expansion joints, unbonded to foundation on one side of joint.
E.
Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.
3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION UNDER CONCRETE SLABS
A.
Place insulation under slabs on grade after base for slab has been compacted.
B.
Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.
C.
Prevent insulation from being displaced or damaged while placing vapor retarder and placing
slab.
3.04 BATT INSTALLATION
A.
Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install in exterior wall and roof spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation.
C.
Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.
D.
Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services
within the plane of the insulation.
E.
Install with factory applied vapor retarder membrane facing warm side of building spaces. Lap
ends and side flanges of membrane over framing members.
F.
Retain insulation batts in place with wire mesh secured to framing members.
G.
Tape seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in membrane.
H.
At wood framing, place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation by stapling at 6 inches on
center. Lap and seal sheet retarder joints over member face.
I.
Tape seal tears or cuts in vapor retarder.
J.
Extend vapor retarder tightly to full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames and other
items interrupting the plane of the membrane. Tape seal in place.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
07 2119 - 1
FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION
SECTION 07 2119
FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Foamed-in-place insulation.
1. In masonry cavity walls.
2. In exterior wall crevices.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010.
B.
ASTM D2842 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2006.
C.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2010b.
D.
ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010.
E.
ASTM E2178 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials; 2003.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide product description, insulation properties, and preparation requirements.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and perimeter conditions
requiring special attention.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type
specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
B.
Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified, with
minimum three years of experience.
1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke limitations.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not apply foam when temperature is below that specified by the manufacturer for ambient air
and substrate.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Foamed-In-Place Insulation:
1. BASF Polyurethane Foam Enterprises LLC: www.basf.us.
2. Demilec (USA) LLC; Product to meet specified requirements www.demilecusa.com.
3. Icynene Inc; : www.icynene.com.
4. North Carolina Foam Industries: www.ncfi.com.
5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS
Reed Bingham State Park
07 2119 - 2
Large Comfort Station Replacement
FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION
LDD-111034.00
A. Foamed-In-Place Insulation: Medium-density, rigid or semi-rigid, open or closed cell
polyurethane foam; foamed on-site, using blowing agent of water or non-ozone-depleting gas.
1. Aged Thermal Resistance (R-value): 5 (deg F hr sq ft)/Btu, minimum, when tested at 1
inch thickness in accordance with ASTM C518 after aging for 180 days at 41 degrees F.
2. Water Vapor Permeance: Vapor retarder; 1 perm, maximum, when tested at intended
thickness in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M, dessicant method.
3. Water Absorption: 1 percent by volume, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM
D2842.
4. Air Permeance: 0.004 cfm/sq ft, maximum, when tested at intended thickness in
accordance with ASTM E2178 at 1.5 psf.
5. Closed Cell Content: At least 90 percent.
6. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/450,
maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A.
Primer: As required by insulation manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify work within construction spaces or crevices is complete prior to insulation application.
B.
Verify that surfaces are clean, dry, and free of matter that may inhibit insulation or overcoat
adhesion.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Mask and protect adjacent surfaces from over spray or dusting.
B.
Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 APPLICATION
A.
Apply insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.04 PROTECTION
A.
Do not permit subsequent construction work to disturb applied insulation.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
07 2500 - 1
WEATHER BARRIERS
SECTION 07 2500
WEATHER BARRIERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Air Barriers: Materials that form a system to stop passage of air through exterior walls, joints
between exterior walls and roof, and joints around frames of openings in exterior walls.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A.
Weather Barrier: Assemblies that form either water-resistive barriers, air barriers, or vapor
retarders.
B.
Air Barrier: Air tight barrier made of material that is relatively air impermeable but water vapor
permeable, both to the degree specified, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent
surfaces. Note: For the purposes of this specification, vapor impermeable air barriers are
classified as vapor retarders.
C.
Vapor Retarder: Air tight barrier made of material that is relatively water vapor impermeable, to
the degree specified, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces.
1. Water Vapor Permeance: For purposes of conversion, 57.2 ng/(Pa s sq m) = 1 perm.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2010b.
B.
ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010.
C.
ASTM E2178 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials; 2003.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on material characteristics.
C.
Shop Drawings: Provide drawings of special joint conditions.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation.
1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the materials manufacturers before, during
and after installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WEATHER BARRIER ASSEMBLIES
A.
Air Barrier:
1. On outside surface of sheathing of exterior walls use air barrier sheet, mechanically
fastened type.
2.02 AIR BARRIER MATERIALS (WATER VAPOR PERMEABLE AND WATER-RESISTIVE)
A.
Air Barrier Sheet, Mechanically Fastened:
1. Air Permeance: 0.004 cubic feet per square foot, maximum, when tested in accordance
with ASTM E2178.
2. Water Vapor Permeance: 5 perms, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM
E96/E96M Procedure A (desiccant method).
Reed Bingham State Park
07 2500 - 2
Large Comfort Station Replacement
WEATHER BARRIERS
LDD-111034.00
3. Ultraviolet and Weathering Resistance: Approved in writing by manufacturer for minimum
of 6 months weather exposure.
4. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index
of 50 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
5. Products:
a. DuPont Company; Tyvek CommercialWrap: www.dupont.com.
b. Fiberweb, Inc; Typar MetroWrap: www.typar.com.
c. Pactiv Corporation; GreenGuard C2000 Building Wrap: greenguard.pactiv.com.
d. VaproShield, LLC; WrapShield: www.vaproshield.com.
2.03 VAPOR RETARDER MATERIALS (AIR BARRIER AND WATER-RESISTIVE) FOR USE BELOW
SLAB
A.
Vapor Retarder Sheet: Multi-layer plastic extrusion of virgin polyolefin resins, yellow color.
1. Thickness: 15 mil.
2. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.1 perm, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM
E96/E96M.
3. Basis of Design Product: Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier manufactured by Stego Industries,
LLC.
4. Other acceptable products: Products that meet the performance specifications and are
acceptable to Lyman Davidson Dooley, Inc.
2.04 SEALANTS
A.
Butyl Sealant: as specified in Section 07 9005.
B.
Polyurethane Sealant: as specified in Section 07 9005.
C.
Silicone Sealant: as specified in Section 07 9005.
2.05 ADHESIVES
A.
Mastic Adhesive: Compatible with sheet seal and substrate, thick mastic of uniform knife grade
consistency.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Remove projections, protruding fasteners, and loose or foreign matter that might interfere with
proper installation.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Air Barriers: Install continuous air tight barrier over surfaces indicated, with sealed seams and
with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces.
C.
Vapor Retarders: Install continuous air tight barrier over surfaces indicated, with sealed seams
and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces.
D.
Mechanically Fastened Sheets - On Exterior:
1. Install sheets shingle-fashion to shed water, with seams generally horizontal.
2. Overlap seams as recommended by manufacturer but at least 6 inches.
3. Overlap at outside and inside corners as recommended by manufacturer but at least 12
inches.
Reed Bingham State Park
07 2500 - 3
Large Comfort Station Replacement
WEATHER BARRIERS
LDD-111034.00
4. For applications specified to be air tight, seal seams, laps, penetrations, tears, and cuts
with self-adhesive tape; use only large-headed, gasketed fasteners recommended by the
manufacturer.
5. Install air barrier and vapor retarder UNDER jamb flashings.
6. Install head flashings under weather barrier.
7. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, wrap excess sheet into opening;
at head, seal sheet over flange and flashing.
E.
Openings and Penetrations in Exterior Weather Barriers:
1. Install flashing over sills, covering entire sill frame member, extending at least 5 inches
onto weather barrier and at least 6 inches up jambs; mechanically fasten stretched edges.
2. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, seal head and jamb flanges
using a continuous bead of sealant compressed by flange and cover flanges with at least 4
inches wide; do not seal sill flange.
3. At openings to be filled with non-flanged frames, seal weather barrier to all sides of opening
framing, using flashing at least 9 inches wide, covering entire depth of framing.
4. At head of openings, install flashing under weather barrier extending at least 2 inches
beyond face of jambs; seal weather barrier to flashing.
5. At interior face of openings, seal gap between window/door frame and rough framing, using
joint sealant over backer rod.
6. Service and Other Penetrations: Form flashing around penetrating item and seal to
weather barrier surface.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Do not cover installed weather barriers until required inspections have been completed.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Do not leave materials exposed to weather longer than recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
07 3113 - 1
ASPHALT SHINGLES
SECTION 07 3113
ASPHALT SHINGLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Asphalt shingle roofing.
B.
Flexible sheet membranes for eave protection, underlayment, and valley protection.
C.
Associated metal flashings and accessories.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM D1970 - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet
Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2009.
B.
ASTM D3161 - Standard Test Method for Wind-Resistance of Asphalt Shingles (Fan-Induced
Method); 2009.
C.
ASTM D3462 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles Made From Glass Felt and Surfaced
With Mineral Granules; 2010a.
D.
ASTM D4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2007.
E.
ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010.
F.
ASTM E108 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings; 2010a.
G.
ICC-ES AC188 - Acceptance Criteria for Roof Underlayments; 2007.
H.
Miami (APD) - Approved Products Directory; Miami-Dade County; database at
www.miamidade.gov/buildingcode.
I.
NRCA MS104 - The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association;
2001, Fifth Edition, with interim updates.
J.
SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors' National Association; 2003.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data indicating material characteristics.
C.
Samples: Submit two samples of each shingle color indicating color range and finish
texture/pattern; for color selection.
D.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation criteria and procedures.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with the recommendations of NRCA Steep Roofing Manual.
1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install shingles or eave protection membrane when surface temperatures are below 45
degrees F.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SHINGLES
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
A. Manufacturers:
1. Atlas Roofing Corporation: www.atlasroofing.com.
2. GAF Materials Corporation: www.gaf.com.
3. Tamko Building Products: www.tamko.com
4. Certainteed Corporation: www.certainteed.com
5. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
6. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
07 3113 - 2
ASPHALT SHINGLES
Asphalt Shingles: Asphalt-coated glass felt, mineral granule surfaced, complying with ASTM
D3462; Class A fire resistance.
1. Wind Resistance: Class F, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3161.
2. Warranted Wind Speed: Not less than tested wind resistance.
3. Miami-Dade County approved.
4. Algae Resistant.
5. Self-sealing type.
6. Style: Laminated overlay.
2.02 SHEET MATERIALS
A.
Eave Protection Membrane: Self-adhering polymer-modified asphalt sheet complying with
ASTM D1970; 40 mil total thickness; with strippable treated release paper and polyethylene
sheet top surface.
B.
Underlayment: Synthetic non-asphaltic sheet, intended by manufacturer for mechanically
fastened roofing underlayment without sealed seams.
1. Type: Woven polypropylene with anti-slip polyolefin coating on both sides.
2. Minimum Requirements: Comply with requirements of ICC-ES AC188 for non-self-adhesive
sheet.
3. Self Sealability: Passing nail sealability test specified in ASTM D1970.
4. Flammability: Minimum of Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM E108.
5. Ultraviolet Resistance and Weatherability: Approved in writing by manufacturer for
exposure to weather for minimum of 6 months.
6. Low Temperature Flexibility: Passing test specified in ASTM D1970.
7. Water Vapor Permeance: Vapor retarder; maximum of 0.1 perm, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E96/E96M Procedure A (desiccant method).
8. Performance: Meet or exceed requirements for ASTM D226, Type II asphalt-saturated
organic felt.
9. Liquid Water Transmission: Passes ASTM D4869.
10. Functional Temperature Range: Minus 70 degrees F to 212 degrees F.
11. Fasteners: As specified by manufacturer and building code qualification report or approval,
if any.
C.
Underlayment: Self-adhering rubber-modified asphalt sheet complying with ASTM D1970; 22 mil
total thickness; with strippable release film and woven polypropylene sheet top surface.
1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with requirements of ICC-ES AC188 for non-self-adhesive
sheet.
2. Self Sealability: Passing nail sealability test specified in ASTM D1970.
3. Low Temperature Flexibility: Passing test specified in ASTM D1970.
4. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.067 perm, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E 96M
Procedure A (desiccant method).
5. Performance: Meet or exceed requirements for ASTM D226, Type II asphalt-saturated
organic felt.
6. Liquid Water Transmission: Passes ASTM D4869.
7. Functional Temperature Range: Minus 70 degrees F to 212 degrees F.
07 3113 - 3
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
ASPHALT SHINGLES
LDD-111034.00
D. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhering polymer-modified asphalt sheet complying with ASTM D1970;
40 mil total thickness; with strippable treated release paper and polyethylene sheet top surface.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A.
Nails: Standard round wire shingle type, of hot-dipped zinc coated steel, 12 gage, 0.105 inch
shank diameter, 3/8 inch head diameter, of sufficient length to penetrate through roof sheathing
or 3/4 inch into roof sheathing or decking.
B.
Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, asphalt roof cement.
C.
Lap Cement: Fibrated cutback asphalt type, recommended for use in application of
underlayment, free of toxic solvents.
D.
Ridge Vents: Plastic, extruded with vent openings that do not permit direct water or weather
entry; flanged to receive shingles.
2.04 METAL FLASHINGS
A.
Metal Flashings: Provide sheet metal eave edge, gable edge, ridge, ridge vents, and open valley
flashing.
1. Form sections square and accurate to profile, in maximum possible lengths, free from
distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance.
2. Hem exposed edges of flashings minimum 1/4 inch on underside.
B.
Sheet Metal: Prefinished aluminum, 0.016 inch thick; PVDF coating, color as selected.
C.
Bituminous Paint: Acid and alkali resistant type; black color.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.
B.
Verify that deck is of sufficient thickness to accept fasteners.
C.
Verify that roof penetrations and plumbing stacks are in place and flashed to deck surface.
D.
Verify roof openings are correctly framed.
E.
Verify deck surfaces are dry, free of ridges, warps, or voids.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Seal roof deck joints wider than 1/16 inch with deck tape.
B.
At areas where eave protection membrane is to be adhered to substrate, fill knot holes and
surface cracks with latex filler.
C.
Broom clean deck surfaces before installing underlayment or eave protection.
D.
Install eave edge flashings tight with fascia boards. Weather lap joints 2 inches and seal with
plastic cement. Secure flange with nails spaced 6 inches on center.
3.03 INSTALLATION - EAVE PROTECTION MEMBRANE
A.
Install eave protection membrane from eave edge to minimum 4 ft up-slope beyond interior face
of exterior wall.
B.
Install eave protection membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.04 INSTALLATION - UNDERLAYMENT
07 3113 - 4
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
ASPHALT SHINGLES
LDD-111034.00
A. At Roof Slopes Up to 4:12 : Install two layers of underlayment over area not protected by eave
protection, with ends and edges weather lapped minimum 4 inches. Stagger end laps of each
consecutive layer. Nail in place.
B.
At Roof Slopes Greater Than 4:12 : Install underlayment perpendicular to slope of roof, with
ends and edges weather lapped minimum 4 inches. Stagger end laps of each consecutive
layer. Nail in place. Weather lap minimum 4 inches over eave protection.
C.
Items projecting through or mounted on roof: Weather lap and seal watertight with plastic
cement.
3.05 INSTALLATION - VALLEY PROTECTION
A.
Install valley protection in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
B.
Install flexible flashing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
At Exposed Valleys: Install one layer of sheet metal flashing, minimum 24 inches wide,
centered over open valley and crimped to guide water. Weather lap joints minimum 2 inch wide
band of lap cement along each edge of first, press roll roofing into cement, and nail in place
minimum 18 inches on center, 1 inch from edges.
3.06 INSTALLATION - METAL FLASHING AND ACCESSORIES
A.
Install flashings in accordance with NRCA requirements.
B.
Weather lap joints minimum 2 inches and seal weather tight with plastic cement.
C.
Secure in place with nails at ____ inches on center. Conceal fastenings.
D.
Items Projecting Through or Mounted on Roofing: Flash and seal weather tight with plastic
cement.
3.07 INSTALLATION - SHINGLES
A.
Install shingles in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Fasten individual shingles using 2 nails per shingle, or as required by code, whichever is
greater.
2. Fasten strip shingles using 4 nails per strip, or as required by code, whichever is greater.
B.
Place shingles in straight coursing pattern with 5 inch weather exposure to produce double
thickness over full roof area. Provide double course of shingles at eaves.
C.
Project first course of shingles 3/4 inch beyond fascia boards.
D.
Extend shingles 1/2 inch beyond face of gable edge fascia boards.
E.
Extend shingles on both slopes across valley in a weave pattern and fasten. Extend shingles a
minimum of 12 inches beyond valley center line to achieve woven valley, concealing the valley
protection.
F.
Cap hips with individual shingles, maintaining 5 inch weather exposure. Place to avoid exposed
nails.
G.
After installation, place one daub of plastic cement, one inch diameter under each individual
shingle tab exposed to weather, to prevent lifting.
H.
Coordinate installation of roof mounted components or work projecting through roof with weather
tight placement of counterflashings.
I.
Complete installation to provide weather tight service.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
3.08 PROTECTION
A.
07 3113 - 5
ASPHALT SHINGLES
Do not permit traffic over finished roof surface.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
07 4646 - 1
FIBER CEMENT SIDING
SECTION 07 4646
FIBER CEMENT SIDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Wood-fiber cement siding.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C1186 - Standard Specification for Flat Fiber Cement Sheets; 2008.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Manufacturer's requirements for related materials to be installed by others.
2. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
4. Installation methods, including nail patterns.
C.
Test Report: Applicable model code authority evaluation report (e.g. ICC-ES).
D.
Maintenance Instructions: Periodic inspection recommendations and maintenance procedures.
E.
Warranty: Submit copy of manufacturer’s warranty, made out in Owner’s name, showing that it
has been registered with manufacturer.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this
section with minimum 3 years of experience.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store products under waterproof cover and elevated above grade, on a flat surface.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SIDING
A.
Lap Siding: Individual horizontal boards made of cement and cellulose fiber formed under high
pressure with integral surface texture, complying with ASTM C1186 Type A Grade II; with
machined edges, for nail attachment.
1. Style: Standard lap style.
2. Texture: Simulated cedar grain.
3. Length: 12 ft, nominal.
4. Width (Height): 6 inches.
5. Thickness: 5/16 inch, nominal.
6. Finish: Factory applied primer.
7. Warranty: 50 year limited; transferable.
8. Lap Siding Manufacturers:
a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
b. James Hardie Building Products, Inc: www.jameshardie.com.
c. Nichiha USA, Inc: www.nichiha.com.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
A. Furring Strips: Galvanized metal channels.
07 4646 - 2
FIBER CEMENT SIDING
B.
Trim: Same material and texture as siding.
C.
Fasteners: Galvanized or corrosion resistant; length as required to penetrate minimum 1-1/4
inch.
D.
Joint Sealer: As specified in Section 07 9005.
E.
Finish Paint: Latex house paint acceptable to siding manufacturer; primer recommended by
paint manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Examine substrate and clean and repair as required to eliminate conditions that would be
detrimental to proper installation.
B.
Do not begin until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.
C.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Lyman Davidson Dooley,
Inc. of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Install sheet metal flashing:
1. Above door and window trim and casings.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
1. Read warranty and comply with all terms necessary to maintain warranty coverage.
2. Install in accordance with conditions stated in model code evaluation report applicable to
location of project.
3. Use trim details indicated on drawings.
4. Touch up all field cut edges before installing.
5. Pre-drill nail holes if necessary to prevent breakage.
B.
Over Wood Studs without Sheathing: Install siding over weather-resistive barrier, fastened into
studs.
C.
Over Masonry Walls: Install furring strips of adequate thickness to accept full length of nails
and spaced at 16 inches on center. Leave space at top and bottom open; top may be behind
soffit; at bottom install insect screen over opening by wrapping a strip of screen over bottom
ends of vertical furring strips.
D.
Allow space between both ends of siding panels that butt against trim for thermal movement;
seal joint between panel and trim with exterior grade sealant.
E.
Joints in Horizontal Siding: Avoid joints in lap siding except at corners; where joints are
inevitable stagger joints between successive courses.
F.
Do not install siding less than 6 inches from surface of ground nor closer than 1 inch to roofs,
patios, porches, and other surfaces where water may collect.
G.
After installation, seal all joints except lap joints of lap siding. Seal around all penetrations.
Paint all exposed cut edges.
H.
Finish Painting: Within one week after installation, paint siding and trim with one coat primer
and two coats finish paint.
3.04 PROTECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B.
07 4646 - 3
FIBER CEMENT SIDING
Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
07 6200 - 1
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
SECTION 07 6200
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings and counterflashings.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American
Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1998.
B.
AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High
Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2005.
C.
ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.
D.
ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2007.
E.
ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
[Metric]; 2007.
F.
ASTM D4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2007.
G.
SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors' National Association; 2003.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods,
flashings, terminations, and installation details.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and
standard details, except as otherwise indicated.
B.
Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with three
years of documented experience.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope
metal sheets to ensure drainage.
B.
Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SHEET MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M); 0.032 inch thick; anodized finish of color as selected.
1. Clear Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Class I clear anodic coating not less
than 0.7 mils thick.
B.
Pre-Finished Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M); 0.032 inch thick; plain finish shop
pre-coated with fluoropolymercoating.
Reed Bingham State Park
07 6200 - 2
Large Comfort Station Replacement
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
LDD-111034.00
1. Fluoropolymer Coating: High Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2604; multiple coat,
thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system.
2. Color: As selected by Lyman Davidson Dooley, Inc. from manufacturer's standard colors.
C.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A666 Type 304, soft temper, 0.015 inch thick; smooth No. 4 finish.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A.
Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers.
B.
Primer: Zinc chromate type.
C.
Sealant: Type as specified in Section 07 9005.
D.
Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where
permitted.
B.
Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.
C.
Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines
accurate to profiles.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
07 9005 - 1
JOINT SEALERS
SECTION 07 9005
JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Sealants and joint backing.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2011.
B.
ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2009.
1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordinate the work with other sections referencing this section.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B.
Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum three years experience.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after
installation.
1.07 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C.
Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight
seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
LOW MODULUS SILICONE SEALANTS:
3.01 Dow Corning Corporation; Product # 790: www.dowcorning.com
A.
Pecora Corporation; Product # 890: www.pecora.com
1. Tremco, Inc., an RPM Company; Product SpecTrem 1: www.tremcosealants.com
B.
Medium Modulus Silicone Sealants:
1. Dow Corning Corporation; Product # 795: www.dowcorning.com
2. Pecora Corporation; Product # 895: www.pecora.com.
3. Tremco Global Sealants; Product SpecTrem 2: www.tremcosealants.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
Reed Bingham State Park
07 9005 - 2
Large Comfort Station Replacement
JOINT SEALERS
LDD-111034.00
C. Multi-Part, Non-Sag Polyurethane Sealants:
1. Tremco, Inc., an RPM Company; Product Vulkem 227: www.tremcosealants.com.
2. Pecora Corporation; Product Dynatrol II: www.pecora.com.
3. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems; Product Sonolastic NP-2:
www.chemrex.com.
4. Tremco, Inc., an RPM Company; Product Dymeric 511: www.tremcosealants.com.
5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
D.
Silicone Bath Sealant for Wet Areas:
1. Dow Corning Corporation; Product 786 Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant:
www.dowcorning.com
2. General Electric Company, Silicone Products Department; Product Sanitary 1700 Silicone
Sealant; www.siliconeforbuilding.com.
3. Pecora Corporation; Product #898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant: www.pecora.com.
E.
Two-Part Polyurethane Sealant for Horizontal Traffic-Bearing Pavements:
1. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems; Product Sonolastic SL2;
www.chemrex.com.
2. Pecora Corporation; Product Urexpan NR-200: www.pecora.com.
3. Tremco, Inc., an RPM Company; Product Vulkem 245/255: www.tremcosealants.com.
4. Tremco, Inc., an RPM Compnay; Product THC-900/THC-901: www.tremcosealants.com.
F.
Paintable Acrylic-Latex Caulking Compound:
1. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems; Product Sonolastic Sonolac:
www.chemrex.com.
2. Bostik, Inc; Product Chem-Calk Painter's Calk: www.bostik-us.com
3. Pecora Corporation; Product SV-20 Acyrlic Latex: www.pecora.com.
4. Tremco, Inc., an RPM Company; Product Tremflex 834: www.tremcosealants.com.
G.
Acrylic Sealants:
1. Tremco, Inc., an RPM Company; Product Mono 555: www.tremcosealants.com.
2. Bostik, Inc.; Product Chem-Calk 600: www.bostik-us.com.
3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
3.02 SEALANTS
A.
Low Modulus Silicone Sealant:
1. Type: One-part, low modulus silicone rubber; meeting ASTM C920-05, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 25.
2. Colors: Standard colors as selected by Architect.
B.
Medium Modulus Silicone Sealant:
1. Type: One-part medium modulus silicone rubber; meeting ASTM C920-05, Type S, Grade
NS, Class 25.
2. Colors: Standard colors as selected by Architect.
C.
Multi-Part, Non-Sag Polyurethane Sealant:
1. Type: Two-part, polyurethane-based sealant with separate pre-packaged color agent to
achieve special colors required; meeting ASTM C920-08, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25.
2. Colors: Standard colors as selected by Architect.
D.
Silicone Bath Sealant for Wet Areas:
1. Type: One-part silicone rubber, mildew- and stain-resistant.
2. Color; White or off-white, as selected by Architect.
E.
Two-Part Polyurethane Sealant for Horizontal Traffic-Bearing Pavements:
07 9005 - 3
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
JOINT SEALERS
LDD-111034.00
1. Type: Two-component polyurethane sealant for horizontal traffic-bearing surfaces meeting
ASTM C920-05, Type M, Grade P or NS, Class 25; non-sag.
2. Colors: Standard colors as selected by Architect.
F.
Paintable Acyrlic-Latex Caulking Compound:
1. Characteristics: Flexible, paintable, non-staining, non-bleeding acrylic emulsion.
G.
Acrylic Sealant:
1. Type: One-part, acrylic polymer sealant.
2. Colors: Standard colors as selected by Architect.
3.03 ACCESSORIES
A.
Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
B.
Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer;
compatible with joint forming materials.
C.
Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC;
oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.
D.
Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit
application.
PART 3 EXECUTION
4.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.
B.
Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
4.02 PREPARATION
A.
Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.
B.
Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193.
D.
Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.
4.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces
and material installation instructions.
B.
Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.
C.
Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve the following, unless otherwise
indicated:
1. Width/depth ratio of 2:1.
2. Neck dimension no greater than 1/3 of the joint width.
3. Surface bond area on each side not less than 75 percent of joint width.
D.
Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
E.
Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
F.
Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when
sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
G.
Tool joints concave.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
4.04 CLEANING
A.
07 9005 - 4
JOINT SEALERS
Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.
4.05 PROTECTION
A.
Protect sealants until cured.
4.06 SCHEDULE
A.
Exterior vertical expansion joints: Low modulus silicone sealant.
B.
Exteiror and interior joints in masonry, including control joints: Low modulus silicone sealant.
C.
Joints between sheathing panels: Multi-part, non-sag polyurethane sealant.
D.
Exterior and interior joints at perimeter of windows: Medium modulus silicone sealant.
E.
Exterior joints between wall finish and conduit and pipe penetrations, base plates of light fixtures,
signage supports and other items applied to exterior wall surface: Medium modulus silicone
sealant.
F.
Interior concealed bedding joints and thresholds: Acrylic sealant.
G.
Exterior and interior horizontal traffic-bearing joints, excluding tile floor joints: Two-part
polyurethane sealant.
H.
Tile expansion and control joint sealant: Refer to Tiling section.
I.
Typical interior joints and seams at abutting and adjacent materials except as specified herein:
Acrylic-latex caulking compound.
J.
Interior joints in conjunction with vanities, fixtures and tile finishes except solid surfacing:
Silicone bath sealant.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
08 1113 - 1
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
SECTION 08 1113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Thermally insulated steel doors.
B.
Accessories, including louvers.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and
Facilities; International Code Council; 2003.
B.
ANSI A250.3 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory-Applied Finish Painted Steel
Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 2007.
C.
ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames;
2003.
D.
ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for
Steel Doors and Frames; 1998 (R2004).
E.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2010.
F.
ASTM C1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by
Means of a Hot Box Apparatus; 2005.
G.
BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2006.
H.
NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors
and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2007.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations,
reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes.
C.
Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and
identifying location of different finishes, if any.
D.
Samples: Submit two samples of metal, 2 x 2 inches in size showing factory finishes, colors,
and surface texture.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B.
Maintain at the project site a copy of all reference standards dealing with installation.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840.
B.
Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
08 1113 - 2
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Steel Doors and Frames:
1. Assa Abloy Ceco, Curries, or Fleming: www.assaabloydss.com.
2. Windsor Republic Doors: www.republicdoor.com.
3. Steelcraft: www.steelcraft.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 DOORS AND FRAMES
A.
Requirements for All Doors and Frames:
1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSI/ICC A117.1.
2. Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges.
3. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges.
4. Door Texture: Smooth faces.
5. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA A156.115, with reinforcement welded in
place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard.
6. Galvanizing for Units in Wet Areas: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated
(galvannealed), manufacturer's standard coating thickness.
7. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.
B.
Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more
than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for
instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the
requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements
conflict, comply with the most stringent.
2.03 STEEL DOORS
A.
Exterior Doors:
1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 4, physical performance Level A, Model 2, seamless.
2. Core: Polystyrene foam.
3. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in
accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness.
4. Insulating Value: U-value of 0.50, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1363.
5. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 7100.
2.04 STEEL FRAMES
A.
General:
1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door.
a. ANSI A250.8 Level 4 Doors: 12 gage frames.
2. Finish: Same as for door.
3. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in masonry or to
be grouted.
4. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member 4 inches high
to fill opening without cutting masonry units.
B.
Exterior Door Frames: Face welded, seamless with joints filled.
1. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in
accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness.
2. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 7100.
2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Louvers: Roll formed steel with overlapping frame; finish same as door components;
factory-installed.
1. Style: Sightproof inverted Y blade.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
2. Fasteners: Concealed fasteners.
08 1113 - 3
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
B.
Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door.
C.
Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop-assembled frames.
2.06 FINISH MATERIALS
A.
Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.
B.
Factory Finish: Complying with ANSI A 250.3, manufacturer's standard coating.
1. Color: To be selected by Lyman Davidson Dooley, Inc. from manufacturer's standard range.
C.
Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high-build, water-resistant, resilient coating.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior
to installation.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM
HMMA 840.
B.
Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.
C.
Coordinate installation of hardware.
D.
Touch up damaged factory finishes.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A.
Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8.
B.
Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
08 3100 - 1
ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
SECTION 08 3100
ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Wall access door and frame units.
B.
Ceiling access door and frame units.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details of
adjoining work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WALL AND CEILING UNITS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Acudor Products Inc: www.acudor.com.
2. Karp Associates, Inc: www.karpinc.com.
3. Milcor by Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc: www.milcorinc.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Door and Frame Units: Factory fabricated, fully assembled units with corner joints welded, filled,
and ground flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements with assemblies
units are to be installed in.
1. Material: Steel.
2. Frames and flanges: 0.058 inch steel.
3. Door panels: 0.070 inch single thickness steel sheet.
4. Sizes:
a. Walls: 12 x 12 inches.
b. Ceilings: 12 x 12 inches.
5. Hardware:
a. Hinge: Non-Fire-Rated Units: 175 degree steel hinges with removable pin.
b. Lock: Screw driver slot for quarter turn cam lock.
6. Galvanized, hot dipped finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that rough openings are correctly sized and located.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install frames plumb and level in openings. Secure rigidly in place.
C.
Position units to provide convenient access to the concealed work requiring access.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
08 5413 - 1
FIBERGLASS AWNING WINDOWS
SECTION 08 5413
FIBERGLASS AWNING WINDOWS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Fibergalss casement/awning window complete with hardware, glazing, weather strip, insect
screen, grilles-between-the glass, jamb extension, sheet rock return, j-channel, and standard or
specified anchors, trim and attachments.
1.02 REFERENCES
A.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. E 283: Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain
Walls, and Doors.
2. E 330: Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtains
Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
3. E 547: Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,
and Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential.
4. E 2190: Specification for Sealed Insulated Glass Units.
B.
Sealed Insulating Glass Manufactures Association / Insulating Glass Certification Council
(SIGMA / IGCC).
C.
American Architectural Manufacturers Association / Window and Door Manufacturers
Association (AAMA / WDMA):
1. 101/I.S. 2/NAFS-02: Voluntary Performance Specification for Windows, Skylights and
Glass Doors/
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Design and Performance Requirements:
1. Window units shall be designed to comply with ANSI / AAMA / NWWDA 101 / I.S.2-97 and
101 / I.S. 2/ NAFS-02
a. IFCA,IFAWN,: (C-LC40), (AP-LC40)
b. IFSWT: (FW-LC40)
c. IFSWP: (FW-LC40)
2. Air leakage shall not exceed the following when tested at 1.57 according to ASTM E 283:
.0.3 cfm per square foot of frame.
3. No water penetration shall occur when units are tested at the following pressure according
to ASTM E547-00:
a. IFCA,IFAWN: (C-LC40 -6.0 psf),(AP-LC40-6.0 psf)
b. IFSWT: (FW-LC40-6.0 psf)
c. IFSWP: (FWLC40-6.0 psf)
4. Units shall be designed to comply with ASTM E330 for structural performance when tested
at the following pressures:
a. IFCA,IFAWN: (C-LC40-60 psf), (AP-LC40-60- psf)
b. IFSWT: (FWLC40-60 psf)
c. IFSWP: (FWL40-60 psf)
d. Design Pressures are applicable to individual units and may vary with unit size.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01 3000.
B.
Product Data: Submit product data.
Reed Bingham State Park
08 5413 - 2
Large Comfort Station Replacement
FIBERGLASS AWNING WINDOWS
LDD-111034.00
C. Samples:
1. Submit corner section.
2. Include glazing system, quality of construction, and specified finish.
D.
Quality Control Submittals: Submit manufacturer's certifications indicating compliance with
specified performance and design requirements.
1.05 DELIVERY
A.
Deliver in original packaging and protect from weather.
1.06 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Prime or seal wood surfaces, including surface to be concealed by wall construction, if more
than thirty (30) days will expire between delivery and installation.
B.
Store window units in an upright position in a clean and dry storage area above ground and
protect from weather.
1.07 WARRANTY
A.
Windows shall be warranted to be free from defects in manufacturing, materials, and
workmanship for a period of ten (10) years from purchase date.
B.
Window glass shall be warranted to be free from defects in manufacturing, materials and
workmanship for period of twenty (20) years from the purchase date.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Integrity Windows: www.integritywindows.com
B.
Pella Corporation: www.pella.com.
C.
Andersen Corporation: www.andersenwindows.com.
2.02 FRAME DESCRIPTION
A.
Interior: Pultruded reinforced fiberglass, 0.070 - 0.077 inch thick.
B.
Frame width: 3 3/32 inches.
C.
Jamb depth: 2 inches.
2.03 SASH DESCRIPTION
A.
Pultruded reinforced fiberglass, 0.075 - 0.077 inch thick.
B.
Composite sash thickness: 15/16” inches.
2.04 GLAZING
A.
Select quality complying with ASTM C 1036. Insulating glass SIGMA/IGCC certified to
performance level CBA when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2190.
B.
Glazing method: 11/16 inch Insulated glass.
C.
Glass type: Frosted Clear Low-E with Argon gas between lites.
D.
Glazing seal: Silicone bedding at exterior. Interior has glazing boot inserted, but no silicone.
2.05 FINISH
A.
Factory baked on acrylic urethane with color to be selected by Lyman Davidson Dooley, Inc.
from manufacturer's full range of colors.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
2.06 HARDWARE
08 5413 - 3
FIBERGLASS AWNING WINDOWS
A.
Standard Casement hardware included top and bottom hinges. Hinges consist of stainless steel
track and injected molded hinge shoe. The hinge arm is E-coated.
B.
Jamb to stile snubbers.
C.
A multi-point locking mechanism from a single point operation.
2.07 WEATHER STRIP
A.
Primary is an extruded PVC foam fill bulb attached to all four sides of the frame by a kerf and
provides seal between sash and frame.
B.
Secondary weatherstrip is an extruded PVC hollow bulb that attaches to a kerf in the sash and
provides seal between sash and frame.
C.
Standard weatherstrip color is black.
2.08 JAMB EXTENSION
A.
Standard: 2”.
2.09 INSECT SCREEN
A.
Factory installed screen. Screen mesh, 18 by 16: Charcoal fiberglass.
B.
Aluminum frame finish: Color selected by Lyman Davidson Dooley, Inc. from manufacturer's full
range of colors/finishes.
2.10 ACCESSORIES AND TRIM
A.
Installation Accessories:
1. Factory installed vinyl folding nailing fin at head, sill and side jambs.
2. Installation brackets: Brackets for 4-9/16 inch; 6-9/16 inch jambs.
3. J-channel.
4. Flush Fin
5. Mullion kit
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verification of Conditions: Before Installation, field verify openings are plumb, and square.
Report frame defects or unsuitable conditions to the General Contractor before proceeding.
B.
Acceptance of Conditions: Beginning of installation confirms acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Assemble and install window unit according to manufacturer's instructions and reviewed shop
drawings.
B.
Install sealant and related backing materials at perimeter of unit or assembly in accordance with
Section 07 9200 Joint Sealants. Do not use expansive foam sealant.
C.
Install accessory items as required.
D.
Use finish nails to apply wood trim and mouldings.
3.03 CLEANING
A.
Remove visible labels and adhesive residue according to manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Leave windows and glass in a clean condition. Final cleaning as required in Section 01 74 00.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
3.04 PROTECTING INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A.
08 5413 - 4
FIBERGLASS AWNING WINDOWS
Protect windows from damage by chemicals, solvents, paint, or other construction operations
that may cause damage.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
08 7100 - 1
DOOR HARDWARE
SECTION 08 7100
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Hardware for hollow steel doors.
B.
Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and
Facilities; International Code Council; 2003.
B.
DHI (LOCS) - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and
Frames; Door and Hardware Institute; 2004.
1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordinate the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of products onto which door hardware
will be installed.
B.
Furnish templates for door and frame preparation to manufacturers and fabricators of products
requiring internal reinforcement for door hardware.
C.
Convey Owner's keying requirements to manufacturers.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog literature for each type of hardware, marked to clearly
show products to be furnished for this project.
C.
Hardware Schedule: Detailed listing of each item of hardware to be installed on each door. Use
door numbering scheme as included in the Contract Documents. Identify electrically operated
items and include power requirements.
D.
Keying Schedule: Submit for approval of Owner.
E.
Keys: Deliver with identifying tags to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware supplier.
F.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
B.
Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware
with 3 years of experience.
C.
Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to assist in
the work of this section.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to
match hardware schedule.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
1.07 WARRANTY
08 7100 - 2
DOOR HARDWARE
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Provide five year warranty for door closers.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DOOR HARDWARE - GENERAL
A.
Provide all hardware specified or required to make doors fully functional, compliant with
applicable codes, and secure to the extent indicated.
B.
Provide all items of a single type of the same model by the same manufacturer.
C.
Provide products that comply with the following:
1. Applicable provisions of federal, state, and local codes.
2. ANSI/ICC A117.1, American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and
Facilities.
D.
Function: Lock and latch function numbers and descriptions of manufactures series as listed in
hardware schedule.
E.
Finishes: Identified in schedule.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work; labeled, fire-rated doors and frames are
present and properly installed, and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes.
B.
Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.
C.
Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item: As listed in
Schedule, unless otherwise noted:
1. For steel doors and frames: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Steel Doors and Frames."
2. For steel doors and frames: See Section 08 1113.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Provide an Architectural Hardware Consultant to inspect installation and certify that hardware
and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
and as specified.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 7000.
B.
Adjust hardware for smooth operation.
3.05 CLEANING
A.
Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. Clean finished hardware per
manufacturer's instructions after final adjustments has been made. Replace items that cannot be
cleaned to manufacturer's level of finish quality at no additional cost.
3.06 PROTECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01 7000.
B.
Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish.
3.07 SCHEDULE - See drawings.
END OF SECTION
08 7100 - 3
DOOR HARDWARE
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
08 8300 - 1
MIRRORS
SECTION 08 8300
MIRRORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Glass mirrors.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2011.
B.
ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2009.
C.
GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2009.
D.
GANA (TIPS) - Mirrors Handle with Extreme Care: Tips For the Professional on the Care and
Handling of Mirrors; National Association of Mirror Manufacturers; 2004
(http://www.mirrorlink.org/members/technical.htm).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data on Mirror Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics,
size limitations, special handling or installation requirements.
C.
Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental
characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors.
D.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual for glazing installation methods.
B.
Fabricate, store, transport, receive, install, and clean mirrors in accordance with
recommendations of GANA (TIPS) "Mirrors Handle with Extreme Care: Tips For the Professional
on the Care and Handling of Mirrors."
1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install mirrors when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F.
B.
Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing
compounds.
1.06 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Provide five year manufacturer warranty for reflective coating on mirrors and replacement of
same.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Mirrors:
1. Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc: www.arch.amarlite.com.
2. Binswanger Mirror/ACI Distribution: www.binswangerglass.com.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
3. Lenoir Mirror Co: www.lenoirmirror.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
08 8300 - 2
MIRRORS
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Mirror Glass - General: Select materials and/or provide supports as required to limit mirrored
glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials,
whichever is less.
B.
Mirror Glass: Clear tempered safety type with copper and silver coating, organic
overcoating,framed edges, 6 mm thick minimum.
2.03 GLAZING COMPOUNDS
A.
Acrylic Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A; single
component, solvent curing, non-bleeding; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; color as selected.
B.
Polysulfide Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M and A ; two
component; chemical curing, non-sagging type; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; color as
selected.
C.
Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M and A; single
component, chemical curing, non-staining, non-bleeding, Shore A Hardness Range 20 to 35;
color as selected.
D.
Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M and A; single component;
chemical curing; non-bleeding, non-staining, cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; color as
selected.
2.04 GLAZING ACCESSORIES
A.
Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness.
B.
Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, self adhesive on one face.
C.
Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 to 15
Shore A durometer hardness; on release paper.
D.
Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.
E.
Mirror Attachment Accessories: Stainless steel clips.
F.
Mirror Adhesive: Chemically compatible with mirror coating and wall substrate.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that openings for mirrored glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
B.
Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to
receive mirrors.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
B.
Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193 for solvent release sealants. Install
sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A.
Install mirrors in accordance with GANA recommendations.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
B. Set mirrors plumb and level, free of optical distortion.
08 8300 - 3
MIRRORS
C.
Set mirrors with edge clearance free of surrounding construction including countertops or
backsplashes.
D.
Installation in Frames:
1. Rest mirrors on setting blocks and push against tape to ensure full contact at perimeter of
mirror.
2. Install removable stops, spacer shims inserted between mirrors and applied stops at 24
inch intervals, 1/4 inch below sight line.
3. Fill gaps between mirror and applied stop with sealant to depth equal to bite on glazing, to
uniform and level line.
4. Trim protruding tape edge.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Remove wet glazing materials from finish surfaces.
B.
Remove labels after work is complete.
C.
Clean mirrors and adjacent surfaces.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
09 6700 - 1
FLUID-APPLIED FLOORING
SECTION 09 6700
FLUID-APPLIED FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Fluid-applied flooring and base.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics; 2010.
B.
ASTM D905 - Standard Test Method for Strength Properties of Adhesive Bonds in Shear by
Compression Loading; 2008.
C.
ASTM D4060 - Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the Taber
Abraser; 2010.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Samples: Submit two samples, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each floor
material for each color specified.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.
D.
Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials,
procedures for stain removal, repairing surface, and suggested schedule for cleaning.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
B.
Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum
three years experience.
C.
Supervisor Qualifications: Trained by product manufacturer.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store resin materials in a dry, secure area.
B.
Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature
stability.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain minimum temperature in storage area of 55 degrees F.
B.
Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation.
C.
Maintain ambient temperature required by manufacturer 72 hours prior to, during, and 24 hours
after installation of materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Fluid-Applied Flooring:
1. Basis of Design: Sherwin-Williams Company/General Polymers; Ceramic Carpet Epoxy:
www.generalpolymers.com.
Reed Bingham State Park
09 6700 - 2
Large Comfort Station Replacement
FLUID-APPLIED FLOORING
LDD-111034.00
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements and with approval of Lyman
Davidson Dooley, Inc.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Fluid-Applied Flooring: Epoxy, single component, thermosetting.
1. Base Coat: entire system including top coat is 1/8 inch thick; color as selected.
2. Top Coat: Epoxy, two component, thermosetting; color as selected.
3. Tensile Strength: 2,500 psi, when tested in accordance with ASTM C307.
4. Compressive Strength: 12,000 psi, when tested in accordance with ASTM C579.
5. Adhesion in Shear Strength: 300 psi minimum, when tested in accordance with ACI 503R.
6. Abrasion Resistance: Maximum weight loss of 90-100 mg/1000 cycles, when tested in
accordance with ASTM D4060.
7. Flammability: Self-Extinguishing over concrete.
8. Mildew Resistance: No growth.
9. Color: Selected by Architect.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A.
Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by flooring material manufacturer.
B.
Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of
work and are ready to receive flooring.
B.
Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,
are dust-free, and are ready to receive flooring.
C.
Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of
materials to sub-floor surfaces.
D.
Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for flooring installation by testing for moisture
emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended
by flooring materials manufacturer.
E.
Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with
sub-floor filler.
B.
Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Grind irregularities above the
surface level. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.
C.
Vacuum clean substrate.
D.
Apply primer to surfaces required by flooring manufacturer.
3.03 INSTALLATION - FLOORING
A.
Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Apply each coat to minimum thickness indicated.
C.
Finish to smooth level surface.
D.
Cove at vertical surfaces.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
3.04 PROTECTION
09 6700 - 3
FLUID-APPLIED FLOORING
A.
Prohibit traffic on floor finish for 48 hours after installation.
B.
Barricade area to protect flooring until cured.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
09 9000 - 1
PAINTING AND COATING
SECTION 09 9000
PAINTING AND COATING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Surface preparation.
B.
Field application of paints, stains, varnishes, and other coatings.
C.
Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and
unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having
factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished.
2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.
3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.
4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of
equipment.
5. Floors, unless specifically so indicated.
6. Glass.
7. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A.
Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.
B.
ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications;
2011.
C.
ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and
Wood-Base Materials; 2007.
D.
GreenSeal GS-11 - Paints; 1993.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products, including VOC content.
C.
Samples: Submit two painted samples, illustrating selected colors and textures for each color
and system selected with specified coats cascaded. Submit on tempered hardboard, 12 x 6
inch in size.
D.
Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings comply with VOC limits specified.
E.
Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings do not contain any of the prohibited
chemicals specified; GreenSeal GS-11 certification is not required but if provided shall constitute
acceptable certification.
F.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures.
G.
Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated
surfaces.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
09 9000 - 2
PAINTING AND COATING
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified, with
minimum three years documented experience.
B.
Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with
minimum three years experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
B.
Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand
code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and
instructions for mixing and reducing.
C.
Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90
degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature
ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
B.
Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of
substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.
C.
Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the
humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
D.
Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F
for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
E.
Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior,
unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
F.
Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same
manufacturer; no exceptions.
B.
Paints:
1. Base Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams Compnay.
2. Duron, Inc: www.duron.com.
3. Glidden Professional: www.gliddenprofessional.com.
4. Benjamin Moore & Co: www.benjaminmoore.com.
5. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc: www.ppgaf.com.
6. Pratt & Lambert Paints: www.prattandlambert.com.
C.
Transparent Finishes:
1. Base Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams Company.
D.
Stains:
1. Base Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams Compnay.
E.
Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL
Reed Bingham State Park
09 9000 - 3
Large Comfort Station Replacement
PAINTING AND COATING
LDD-111034.00
A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating.
1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and
uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and
capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under
conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing
and field experience.
3. For opaque finishes, tint each coat including primer coat and intermediate coats, one-half
shade lighter than succeeding coat, with final finish coat as base color.
4. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a
single production run.
5. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure
is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.
B.
Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer
categorized as "best" by the manufacturer.
C.
Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:
1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following:
a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings.
b. Ozone Transport Commission (OTC) Model Rule, Architectural, Industrial, and
Maintenance Coatings; www.otcair.org; specifically:
1) Opaque, Flat: 50 g/L, maximum.
2) Opaque, Nonflat: 150 g/L, maximum.
3) Opaque, High Gloss: 250 g/L, maximum.
4) Varnishes: 350 g/L, maximum.
2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at
project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Chemical Content: The following compounds are prohibited:
1. Aromatic Compounds: In excess of 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds
(hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings).
2. Acrolein, acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di
(2-ethylhexyl) phthalate, di-n-butyl phthalate, di-n-octyl phthalate, 1,2-dichlorobenzene,
diethyl phthalate, dimethyl phthalate, ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium,
isophorone, lead, mercury, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylene
chloride, naphthalene, toluene (methylbenzene), 1,1,1-trichloroethane, vinyl chloride.
E.
Colors: As indicated on drawings
2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR
A.
Fiber Cement Siding, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of latex primer sealer.
B.
Paint WE-TR-VS - Wood, Transparent, Varnish, Stain:
1. One coat of stain; water based.
2. One coat sealer.
C.
Galvanized Metals, Alkyd, 3 Coat:
1. One coat galvanize primer.
2.04 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR
A.
Wood, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of latex primer sealer.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
B. Concrete/Masonry, Opaque, Epoxy, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of block filler.
C.
09 9000 - 4
PAINTING AND COATING
Galvanized Metals, Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat galvanize primer.
2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding
materials, and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically
indicated or not; commercial quality.
B.
Patching Material: Latex filler.
C.
Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
B.
Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any
condition that may potentially affect proper application.
C.
Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
D.
Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes
unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:
1. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent.
2. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.
3. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.
B.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
C.
Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,
escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
D.
Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.
E.
Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate
and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
F.
Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or
alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium
phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding
metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.
G.
Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with
solvent. Apply coat of etching primer.
H.
Corroded Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Prepare using at least SSPC-PC 2 (hand tool
cleaning) or SSPC-SP 3 (power tool cleaning) followed by SSPC-SP 1 (solvent cleaning).
Reed Bingham State Park
09 9000 - 5
Large Comfort Station Replacement
PAINTING AND COATING
LDD-111034.00
I.
Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld
splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand or power
tool wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of
phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint
entire surface; spot prime after repairs.
J.
Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and
rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent.
Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.
K.
Exterior Wood to Receive Transparent Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter; seal
knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking
compound after sealer has been applied. Prime concealed surfaces.
3.03 APPLICATION
A.
Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is
applied.
C.
Apply each coat to uniform appearance.
D.
Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
E.
Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior
to applying next coat.
F.
Wood to Receive Transparent Finishes: Tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain
before set. Wipe excess from surface.
G.
Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed
prior to finishing.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and
remove daily from site.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Protect finished coatings until completion of project.
B.
Touch-up damaged coatings after Substantial Completion.
3.06 SCHEDULE - PAINT SYSTEMS- See Drawings
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
10 1400 - 1
SIGNAGE
SECTION 10 1400
SIGNAGE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Room and door signs.
B.
Building identification signs.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and
Facilities; International Code Council; 2003.
B.
ATBCB ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines; 2002.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of sign, indicating sign
styles, font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign.
C.
Signage Schedule: Provide information sufficient to completely define each sign for fabrication,
including room number, room name, other text to be applied, sign and letter sizes, fonts, and
colors.
1. When room numbers to appear on signs differ from those on the drawings, include the
drawing room number on schedule.
2. When content of signs is indicated to be determined later, request such information from
Owner through Lyman Davidson Dooley, Inc. at least 2 months prior to start of fabrication;
upon request, submit preliminary schedule.
3. Submit for approval by Owner through Lyman Davidson Dooley, Inc. prior to fabrication.
D.
Samples: Submit two samples of each type of sign, of size similar to that required for project,
illustrating sign style, font, and method of attachment.
E.
Selection Samples: Where colors are not specified, submit two sets of color selection charts or
chips.
F.
Verification Samples: Submit samples showing colors specified.
G.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include installation templates and attachment devices.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation.
B.
Package room and door signs in sequential order of installation, labeled by floor or building.
C.
Store tape adhesive at normal room temperature.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
A. Flat Signs:
1. Best Sign Systems, Inc: www.bestsigns.com.
2. Mohawk Sign Systems, Inc: www.mohawksign.com.
3. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/aec.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
10 1400 - 2
SIGNAGE
Other Signs:
2.02 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS
A.
Accessibility Compliance: All signs are required to comply with ADAAG and ANSI/ICC A 117.1
and applicable building codes, unless otherwise indicated; in the event of conflicting
requirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specific requirements.
B.
Room and Door Signs: Provide a sign for every doorway, whether it has a door or not, not
including corridors, lobbies, and similar open areas.
1. Sign Type: Flat signs with injection molded panel media as specified.
2. Provide "tactile" signage, with letters raised minimum 1/32 inch and Grade II braille.
3. Character Height: 1 inch.
4. Sign Height: 2 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Rest Rooms: Identify with pictograms, the names "MEN" and "WOMEN", and braille.
C.
Building Identification Signs:
2.03 SIGN TYPES
A.
Flat Signs: Signage media without frame.
1. Edges: Square.
2. Corners: Radiused.
3. Wall Mounting of One-Sided Signs: Concealed screws.
B.
Color and Font: Unless otherwise indicated:
1. Character Font: Helvetica, Arial, or other sans serif font.
2. Character Case: Upper case only.
3. Background Color: Clear.
4. Character Color: Contrasting color.
2.04 TACTILE SIGNAGE MEDIA
A.
Engraved Panels: Laminated colored plastic; engraved through face to expose core as
background color:
1. Total Thickness: 1/16 inch.
B.
Injection Molded Panels: One-piece acrylic plastic, with raised letters and braille.
1. Total Thickness: 1/8 inch.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A.
Concealed Screws: Stainless steel, galvanized steel, chrome plated, or other non-corroding
metal.
B.
Tape Adhesive: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
B. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level.
10 1400 - 3
SIGNAGE
C.
Locate signs where indicated:
1. Room and Door Signs: Locate on wall at latch side of door with centerline of sign at 60
inches above finished floor.
2. If no location is indicated obtain Owner's instructions.
D.
Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damage items.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
10 2113.19 - 1
PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
SECTION 10 2113.19
PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Solid plastic toilet compartment doors.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordination: Coordinate the work with placement of support framing and anchors in walls and
ceilings.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall supports,
door swings.
C.
Product Data: Provide data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Plastic Toilet Compartments:
1. Ampco Products, Inc: www.ampco.com.
2. Metpar Corp: www.metpar.com.
3. Scranton Products (Santana/Comtec/Capital): www.scrantonproducts.com.
4. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A.
Toilet Compartments: Solid molded high density polyethylene (HDPE) doors.
1. Color: as selected by Lyman Davidson Dooley, Inc. from manufacturer's full range.
B.
Door Dimensions:
1. Thickness: 1 inch.
2. Door Width: 24 inch.
3. Door Width for Handicapped Use: 36 inch, out-swinging.
4. Height: 58 inch.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A.
Hardware: Polished stainless steel:
1. Pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; two per door.
2. Door Latch: Slide type with exterior emergency access feature.
3. Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; mounted on pilaster in alignment with door
latch.
4. Coat hook with rubber bumper; one per compartment, mounted on door.
5. Provide door pull for outswinging doors.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
B. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures.
C.
10 2113.19 - 2
PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install doors secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Maintain 3/8 to 1/2 inch space between wall and doors.
C.
Attach door brackets securely to walls using anchor devices.
D.
Field touch-up of scratches or damaged finish will not be permitted. Replace damaged or
scratched materials with new materials.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch.
B.
Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16
inch.
B.
Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return out-swinging
doors to closed position.
C.
Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
10 2800 - 1
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
SECTION 10 2800
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Accessories for toilet rooms.
B.
Grab bars.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel
Tubing for General Service; 2010.
B.
ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.
1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement, concealed ceiling
supports, and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function,
attachment methods.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Toilet Accessories:
1. American Specialties, Inc: www.americanspecialties.com.
2. Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com.
3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc: www.bobrick.com
4. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
All items of each type to be made by the same manufacturer.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete
with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.
1. Grind welded joints smooth.
2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces.
B.
Keys: Provide keys for each accessory to Owner; master key all lockable accessories.
C.
Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304.
D.
Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, Type 304 or 316.
2.03 FINISHES
A.
Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin brushed finish, unless otherwise noted.
B.
Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.
2.04 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES- See Drawings for Basis of Design Accessories
Reed Bingham State Park
10 2800 - 2
Large Comfort Station Replacement
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
LDD-111034.00
A. Grab Bars: Stainless steel, 1-1/4 inches outside diameter, minimum 0.05 inch wall thickness,
nonslip grasping surface finish, concealed flange mounting; 1-1/2 inches clearance between wall
and inside of grab bar.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify exact location of accessories for installation.
C.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation.
B.
Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
B.
Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.
C.
Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
12 3600 - 1
COUNTERTOPS
SECTION 12 3600
COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Wall-hung counters and vanity tops.
B.
Sinks molded into countertops.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI Z124.3 - American National Standard for Plastic Lavatories; 2005.
B.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2010b.
C.
AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009.
D.
ISSFA-2 - Classification and Standards for Solid Surfacing Material; International Solid Surface
Fabricators Association; 2001 (2007).
E.
NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005.
F.
PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2007.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Specimen warranty.
C.
Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation.
D.
Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, color chips representing manufacturer's
full range of available colors and patterns.
E.
Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, minimum size 6 inches square,
representing actual product, color, and patterns.
F.
Test Reports: Chemical resistance testing, showing compliance with specified requirements.
G.
Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for maintenance and
repair of countertop surfaces.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B.
Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials,
in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
12 3600 - 2
COUNTERTOPS
Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 COUNTERTOP ASSEMBLIES
A.
Quality Standard: Premium Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork
Standards.
B.
Solid Surfacing Countertops: Solid surfacing sheet or plastic resin casting over continuous
substrate.
1. Flat Sheet Thickness: 1/4 inch, minimum.
2. Solid Surfacing Sheet and Plastic Resin Castings: Complying with ISSFA-2 and NEMA LD
3; acrylic resin, mineral filler, and pigments; homogenous, non-porous and capable of being
worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surface coating; color and
pattern consistent throughout thickness.
a. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread 25, maximum; smoke developed 450,
maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
b. NSF approved for food contact.
c. Sinks and Bowls: Integral castings; minimum 3/4 inch wall thickness; comply with
ANSI Z124.3.
d. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Matte, gloss rating of 5 to 20.
e. Color and Pattern: As selected by Lyman Davidson Dooley, Inc. from manufacturer's
full line.
f.
Manufacturers:
1) Dupont: www.corian.com.
2) Formica Corporation: www.formica.com.
3) Avonite Surfaces: www.avonitesurfaces.com.
4) Wilsonart International, Inc: www.wilsonart.com.
5) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
3. Other Components Thickness: 1/2 inch, minimum.
4. Exposed Edge Treatment: Built up to minimum 1-1/4 inch thick; radiused edge; use marine
edge at sinks.
5. Back and End Splashes: Same sheet material, square top; minimum 4 inches high.
6. Skirts: As indicated on drawings.
2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Plywood for Supporting Substrate: PS 1 Exterior Grade, A-C veneer grade, minimum 5-ply;
minimum 3/4 inch thick; join lengths using metal splines.
B.
Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of
materials being joined.
C.
Joint Sealant: Mildew-resistant silicone sealant, clear.
2.03 FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints flush.
1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer.
2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch except where top butts against
cabinet or wall.
3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or
unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes.
Reed Bingham State Park
12 3600 - 3
Large Comfort Station Replacement
COUNTERTOPS
LDD-111034.00
B. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof
glue.
2. Height: 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Solid Surfacing: Fabricate tops up to 144 inches long in one piece; join pieces with adhesive
sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.
D.
Wall-Mounted Counters: Provide skirts, aprons, brackets, and braces as indicated on drawings,
finished to match.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Lyman Davidson Dooley,
Inc. of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
C.
Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets
are installed in proper locations.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Securely attach countertops to support structure using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces
level; shim where required.
B.
Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A.
Variation From Horizontal: 1/8 inch in 10 feet, maximum.
B.
Offset From Wall, Countertops: 1/8 inch maximum; 1/16 inch minimum.
C.
Field Joints: 1/8 inch wide, maximum.
3.05 CLEANING
A.
Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly.
3.06 PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products until completion of project.
B.
Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
22 0510- 1
GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 22 0510 - GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Definitions
B.
Assurance Requirements and Installer Qualifications.
C.
Submittal Procedures Supplementing Section 01 3300.
D.
Operating and Maintenance Manuals
E.
Execution Requirements common to Division 22 systems
F.
Mechanical sleeve seals.
G.
Pipe Sleeves within building
H.
Pipe Sleeves in footings and foundations
I.
Piping Pressure Tests.
J.
Equipment bases and housekeeping pads
K.
Training Requirements
L.
Cleaning Requirements.
M. Finishing Requirements
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 01 3300 - Submittal, for submittal procedures.
B.
Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
C.
Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures, for additional submittal and warranty requirements.
D.
Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
E.
Section 07 8400 - Firestopping.
F.
Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants
G.
Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating.
1.03 ALTERNATIVES
A.
Refer to Section 01 2300 - Alternates, for product alternatives affecting this Division.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A.
Manufacturers Representatives: Wherever MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE is
referred to in this division, said representative shall be regularly employed by the manufacturer
to perform similar activities to those called for herein, which indicates his competence in that
field of work.
B.
Concealed: Where the word concealed is used in this Division, it shall mean items above
ceilings, in attics, in crawl spaces, in chases, in tunnels, in cabinet work, and under counters or
equipment so as to be not visible from an elevation of 5 feet at a horizontal distance of 10 feet.
C.
Finished Spaces or Areas: Where finished spaces or areas are referred to in this Division, it
shall mean all spaces except concealed spaces, mechanical rooms, or boiler rooms unless
otherwise noted.
D.
Provide: Furnish and install.
E.
Control and Interlock Wiring: All wiring, both line voltage and low voltage, other than power
wiring from an electrical distribution panel, through the primary control device, to the item of
equipment.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
22 0510- 2
GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
F.
Primary Control Device: That ONE device for any item of equipment which interrupts power
flow during normal operation. Where magnetic starters are provided, they are the primary
control. For items not switches by starters, the primary control device will be that ONE
thermostat, time clock, manual switch, aquastat, P.E. switch, or relay performing the primary
switching.
G.
Diagrammatic: A drawing that shows arrangement and relations (as of parts).i.e: A
diagrammatic drawing uses symbols rather than pictorial representation of pipes and other
items shown and is not necessarily to scale. Arrangement, location, and sizes shown are firm.
H.
Readily Accessible: Equipment, valves and other items requiring service shall be installed to be
readily accessible. These items shall be available for maintenance or use in a space, through
an access door from floor elevation, or above a lay-in ceiling by maintenance staff standing on
a ladder no taller than the ceiling.
I.
Noted, Indicated or Shown: Where the terms "Noted", "Indicated" or "Shown" are used in these
specifications, the words "in the specifications or on the plans" shall be inferred.
J.
Detail: Where reference is made to a Detail, the Detail shall be on the plans unless otherwise
noted.
K.
Specifications: Where reference is made to these specifications, it shall be inferred in this
Division of specifications.
L.
Notification by the Contractor, and Instructions to the Contractor: Where reference is made in
these specifications to notification by or instructions given to the Contractor, it shall be inferred
that the Engineer shall be the instructor or shall be notified, as the case exists.
M. Division or Section Reference: Where reference is made to another Division or Section within
this Division, refer to specifications table of contents for Division, Section, or Page Number.
N.
Flow Diagram: A single-line, two-dimension, non-scaled drawing depicting arrangement and
sequence of equipment, valves, controls, thermometers, gauges, and other specialty devices in
a pipe system.
1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Where requirements of these specifications exceed specified codes and ordinances, conform to
these specifications.
B.
Materials and equipment included in Underwriters Label Service shall bear that label. Electrical
equipment shall be U.L. approved as installed.
C.
Jurisdiction: Where codes or guides refer jurisdiction to local governing code officials, such
official in this procedure shall be the State Fire Marshal.
D.
Permits and Codes: Refer to General Conditions.
E.
Plumbing: Conform to the Georgia State Minimum Standard Plumbing Code (International
Plumbing Code), 2006 Edition, with 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011 & 2012 Georgia State
Amendments.
F.
Fire Prevention Precautions in Cutting and Welding Areas: Conform to Article 2605 Fire
Prevention Precautions, Georgia State Minimum Standard Fire Prevention Code (International
Fire Code), 2006 Edition, with 2007 & 2010 Georgia State Amendments, for all work involving
cutting and welding.
G.
Energy: Conform to the Georgia State Energy Code for Buildings (International Energy
Conservation Code), 2009 Edition, with 2011 & 2012 Georgia State Amendments.
H.
Electrical: Refer to Division 26. Conform to the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70, 2008 with
2009 Georgia State Amendments.
I.
Building Code: Conform to the Georgia State Minimum Standard Building Code (International
Building Code), 2006 Edition with 2007, 2009 & 2010 Georgia State Amendments.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
22 0510- 3
GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
1.06 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Requirements specified herein are minimum. All equipment, when installed, shall perform
equal to or exceed specified requirements.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A.
Supplementing Division 1 requirements; the Contractor shall:
1. Review the submittal data and check to ensure compliance with specifications prior to
submitting.
a. The Contractor agrees that submittals of equipment and material and shop drawings
of equipment and material layouts required under provisions of these specifications
and processed by the Engineer are not Change Orders. The purpose of submittals is
to demonstrate that the Contractor understands the design concept of the project by
indicating the equipment and materials he intends to furnish and install, and by
detailing the installation he intends to achieve.
b. Any submittal or shop drawing not conforming to the Contract Documents without this
identification and notification shall be assumed to be marked "Revise and Resubmit" (
acknowledges this by the submission), and the Contractor shall promptly resubmit
said submittal so as to be in full compliance with the Contract Documents.
c. Failure of the Contractor to provide this information during the shop drawing phase
shall make the Contractor responsible for all changes to achieve compliance with the
Contract Documents without additional compensation.
2. Assemble the submittal data in compete sets in hard back three-ring binders, separate
binders, and bound with numbered index sheets and tabs. All submittal data shall be
submitted at one time unless unavailable data would delay project progress. Data shall
include capacities, complete installation instructions, dimensional data and electrical data,
BHP, motor HP, operating weights and load distribution at mounting points. Any submittals
sent in pieces or not secured in a three ring binder will be marked not reviewed and will be
returned to the contractor.
3. Identify all submittals by a cover sheet showing project name, specification sections,
drawing or detail number, room number, date, revision date, contractor and
subcontractor's organization and project manager with phone number, the model, style
and size of item being submitted with manufacturers' representative, salesman (or a
preparer who can answer questions), and Preparer's phone number.
4. Manufacturers' standard drawings shall be modified by deletions or additions to show only
items applicable to this project.
5. Prepare a master list of submittal proposed to be submitted on the project. This list shall
be updated for each submission and shall be the first sheet(s) of the submission in the
quantity that is submitted for review. The information and general format shall contain an
Tab number, Item Description, Item Status and any comment.
6. Provide a Letter stating that all submittals have been checked for compliance with
specifications.
B.
Tabulation of Power Wiring Requirements: Within 60 Days of the Notice to Proceed, provide a
Tabulation of Power Wiring Requirements of all proposed equipment, including H.P., amps,
voltage, phase and KW, tabulated on a separate sheet. A copy of the tabulation shall be
transmitted independently to the Contractor, the Engineer and to all affected trades. (Refer to
Electrical Drawings for electrical provisions for equipment.)
C.
Product Data:
1. Provide data specific to the Product proposed indicating capacity data, all standard and
optional features to be supplied and all accessories and options available for that product.
2. Manufacturer's standard drawings shall be modified by deletions or additions to show only
items applicable to this project.
D.
Warranty: Submit the Contractor's warranty letter addressed to the Owner stating the correct
project name and number, if applicable, the warranty period and ensure that form has the
correct date of the Final Observation.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
22 0510- 4
GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
1.08 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Three (3) bound and indexed Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be prepared by the
Contractor for all equipment and be submitted for approval a minimum of two months prior to
Substantial Completion. Two (2) approved copies shall be delivered to the Using Agency at the
Final Observation.
B.
Each Manual shall be compiled as follows:
1. Data shall be bound in smooth surface hard back commercial quality three-ring notebooks
with project identification shown on the front cover and binding back. Identification labels
shall be typed and adhered with waterproof glue.
2. Notebooks shall have 9-1/2-inch by 11-1/2-inch covers with back width to permit the
covers to lie parallel or to converge, and have not less than 1-1/2-inch back width.
3. Index divider sheets of heavy Manila paper shall be inserted between each section of the
Manual with a 2-inch x 1/3-inch ready-cut shield tab attached to each sheet for
identification of sections.
4. Data sheets and diagrams shall be 8-1/2-inch x 11-inch or be mounted on 8-1/2-inch x 11inch sheets of 16-pound paper if smaller, with reinforced 11-inch mechanically perforated
edges. Drawings and diagrams larger than 8-1/2-inch by 11-inch shall be folded up from
the bottom to form a height of 11-inches and folded to the left to form a width of 8-1/2inches.
5. Table of Contents(Index) sheets shall be provided in the order listed with identifications
typed in capital letters.
C.
Each Manual shall contain the following information, data and drawings:
1. Copies of all submittals(with Engineer's review comments and stamp), including all
equipment and materials.
2. Manufacturer's installation, operating and maintenance instructions for each item of
equipment with moving parts including recommended frequency of inspections and
maintenance for one years period of time.
3. Manufacturer's list of renewal parts for each item of equipment with recommended stock
items and quantities indicated.
4. Copies of as-built shop drawings showing layouts and construction details.
1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Plumbing Installer Qualifications:
1. Wherever the word "company" or "firm" is used in these subparagraphs, it shall mean the
contractor/subcontractor of record for the installations used for proficiency qualification.
2. Refer to the individual sections within this division for additional installer qualification
requirements.
3. The Contractor expressly warrants that the company performing the installation of the
plumbing systems has demonstrated proficiency in the installation and adjustment of such
systems by the successful performance of work of the nature specified herein on at least
three commercial or institutional buildings, each containing water heating systems,
pumping systems (i.e. hot water recirculation, sump pumps, or pressure booster pumps),
and a minimum of 15 plumbing fixtures.
4. The Contractor also warrants that the aforesaid installer, if any, has been in business
performing services of the nature specified herein for at least five (5) years.
1.10 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A.
Accept all products on site in factory-fabricated protective containers. Inspect for damage.
B.
Store products in a clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic.
C.
Handle products carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish.
D.
After placement, protect products from damage during construction, by all trade contractors.
E.
Protect equipment nameplates and labels from damage, being painted, scaring, etc.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
22 0510- 5
GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
1.11 WARRANTY
A.
Refer to section 01 7700, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Where extended warranties beyond the Contractor's one (1) year warranty are specified, the
additional warranty time shall start at the end of the Contractor's warranty.
C.
Correct defective Work for a one year period after Date of Final Observation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A.
Manufacturers: Link-Seal series 300M as manufactured by Thunderline Corporation or
Metraseal by Metraflex.
B.
Synthetic rubber elements linked together to form a watertight seal between pipe and opening
for penetrations.
C.
Openings in new construction shall be provided with schedule 40 pipe sleeves having 10 gauge
leak plate, 4-inch larger than sleeve O.D., welded thereto and poured in place.
2.02 PREFABRICATED PIPE SLEEVES (FOR PLUMBING PIPING):
A.
Manufacturers: 'Pro-Set' Systems.
B.
Description: Pre-engineered plastic (PVC) sleeve system, ASTM E-814 high temperature, fire,
water and smoke-proof sleeve systems tested for up to 4-hours rating.
C.
Sleeve system shall be sized and installed per manufacturers instructions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Refer to the specifications and Architectural and Structural drawings for additional requirements
pertaining to work under this discipline. Notify the Engineer for clarification in the event of
conflict.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Drawings are diagrammatic and show the general proximity of the equipment and pipes. They
are not to be scaled, and do not include all required changes in direction or offsets necessary in
coordinating the installation of various materials either between trades or within the same trade.
All dimensions shall be verified at the building site. Prefabrication and/or installation of work
from drawings shall be at the Contractor's risk. Refer to Architectural plans for exact building
dimensions and details.
B.
Space Conditions:
1. All apparatus shall fit into the available spaces in the building and must be introduced into
the building so as not to cause damage to the structure. Equipment larger than access to
equipment spaces shall be disassembled into sub-assemblies for installation.
2. Where deviations from the plans are required in order to conform to the space limitations,
such changes shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner and shall be subject to
approval.
3. All equipment requiring service shall be made accessible. Coordinate piping installation to
avoid conflict with other trades.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Clearance above and in front of electrical switchgear, electrical power panels or control panels
shall be maintained by mechanical systems so that no pipes, vents, or equipment is routed
above or across the space directly above this equipment in conformance with the National
Electrical Code.
B.
All equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers' published installation
instructions shipped with the equipment. In the event there is a discrepancy between these
specifications or Drawings and the manufacturers' instructions, no work shall be performed until
additional instructions are received.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
22 0510- 6
GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
C.
Install and connect all appliances, equipment, and appurtenances as specified, indicated or
required in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Furnish and
install complete auxiliary piping, water seals, valves, electric connections, and similar items,
recommended by the manufacturer or as required for proper operation.
D.
Route piping to avoid skylights, translucent, and transparent ceilings.
E.
Pipe Sleeves in Slabs, Masonry Walls and Partitions:
1. Provide sleeves in all slabs and walls/partitions unless otherwise noted.
2. Omit sleeves on cast iron pipe through slabs on grade.
3. Masonry Partitions: Schedule 40 black steel pipe: Sleeves shall be sized to include the
insulation with minimum gap around insulation. Install, without developing a break in the
pipe insulation, according to the fire sealant manufacturer's installation instructions for a
U.L. Listed assembly for a rated pipe penetration through a rated masonry wall/partition.
4. Rated Drywall Partitions: Twenty gage galvanized steel. Sleeves shall be sized to include
the insulation with minimum gap around the insulation. Install, without developing a break
in the pipe insulation, according to the fire sealant manufacturer's installation instructions
for a U.L. Listed assembly for a rated pipe penetration through a rated drywall
wall/partition.
5. Non-Rated Drywall Partitions: Omit sleeves.
F.
Pipe sleeves in footings and foundation walls:
1. Schedule 40 black steel pipe.
2. Water pipe, distribution piping, soil or waste pipe or building drain passing under a footing
or through a foundation wall shall be installed in a pipe sleeve, two pipe sizes larger than
the pipe passing through.
G.
Seal sleeves and openings in exterior walls, mechanical room walls, and fire rated partitions
vaportight, watertight, or for smoke/fire protection as applicable. Refer to Section 07 2250 Firestopping
H.
Seal sleeves and openings in exterior walls vaportight, watertight, or for smoke/fire protection
as applicable. Refer to Section 07 9200, Sealants and caulking.
I.
Equipment and pipe support upper attachments shall be 3" x 3" x 1/4" galvanized steel angles,
minimum, spanning structural members unless noted otherwise. Provide inserts and bolts for
supporting pipes and equipment from structural members.
3.04 PIPING PRESSURE TESTS
A.
General:
1. Provide 48 hours notification to the Engineer in advance of any test.
2. Complete tests prior to insulating. Leaks shall be repaired, defective materials replaced,
and system shall be retested. Strike all joints in copper and steel piping under a pressure
test. Conduct tests prior to connecting to equipment or isolate equipment from system.
3. No water pressure test shall be conducted in freezing weather where subject to freezing.
4. Test shall be maintained at conditions specified until approved but, in no event, for less
than eight (8) hours minimum duration, unless otherwise noted.
5. Hydrostatic pressure tests shall maintain pressure without change, except that due to
temperature change.
B.
Domestic Water System: Hydrostatic test; 150 PSIG.
C.
Soil, Waste and Vent System: Static test; 10 feet minimum head. Test system in its entirety or
in sections. Plug all openings except highest opening above the roof. Water shall be kept in the
system, or in the portion under test, for a minimum of one (1) hour. Inspect the system, or the
portion under test, after one (1) hour, the system shall be tight at all points.
3.05 EQUIPMENT BASES and HOUSEKEEPING PADS
A.
Provide housekeeping and equipment bases as shown or listed below. Rough up slab under
bases before pouring concrete.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
22 0510- 7
GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
B.
Materials: Refer to Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. Omit test cylinders for concrete
poured under this section.
C.
Bases/Pads shall be rectangular with vertical sides 2 inches from edges of equipment, unless
otherwise noted.
D.
Height:
1. Water Heater: 4-inches.
2. Concrete curb at all pipe penetrations of floors in mechanical rooms above grade: 4inches or as shown on plans.
3. Housekeeping Pads for Other Equipment: 4-inches or as shown on plans.
E.
Chamfer: 3/4-inch on edges and corners.
F.
Reinforcing: 6"x 6" 10/10 WWF at mid-depth of slab. (4 inch thick pads.)
3.06 STARTING EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A.
Adjust equipment for proper operation within manufacturers' published tolerances.
B.
Demonstrate proper operation of equipment to the Owner 's designated representative.
3.07 DEMONSTRATION, TRAINING AND INSTRUCTIONS
A.
Instruct operating personnel designated by the Owner in operation and maintenance of system
prior to request for final inspection. Provide signed statement certifying instructions have been
received.
B.
The Contractor shall give notice to the Engineer not less than 60 days of the anticipated date of
instruction to allow planning by the Owner.
C.
The Contractor shall request the instruction date not less than 15 days of the desired date for
coordination with the Owner. Operating manuals for the equipment/systems on which
instructions are being given shall be in the possession of the operating personnel not less than
30 days prior to the date of instruction.
D.
The Contractor shall develop not less than three (3) copies of the instructions with an index for
easy retrieval of information.
3.08 CLEANING and PROTECTION
A.
All materials, equipment and mechanical rooms shall be cleaned prior to Final Observation.
B.
Paint equipment where finish has been damaged requiring retouching of finish to match factory
finish.
C.
Chipped or scraped paint shall be retouched to match original finish.
D.
Clean and polish all equipment nameplates. All nameplate information shall be legible.
E.
All dents and sags in equipment casings shall be straightened.
F.
All insulation, equipment, pipe, pipe fittings and appurtenances shall be free of dust, rust and
stains prior to Final Observation.
3.09 FINISHING PLUMBING EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL
A.
Use paint systems specified in Division 9 for the substrates to be finished.
B.
Paint shop-primed equipment.
C.
Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed
prior to finishing.
D.
Paint all exposed pipes occurring in finished areas to match background surfaces, unless
otherwise indicated.
E.
All ferrous fasteners and hanger supports not having a corrosion resistant plated finish shall be
painted to prevent rust.
F.
Paint all exposed un-insulated ferrous metals.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
22 0519- 1
METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
SECTION 22 0519 - METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Pressure gauges and pressure gauge tappings.
B.
Thermometers and thermometer supports.
C.
Test plugs.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 22 0510 - General Plumbing Requirements.
B.
Section 22 0719 - Plumbing Piping Insulation.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASME B40.100 - Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments; The American Society of
Mechanical Engineers; 2005.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section - 22 0510 General Plumbing Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide list that indicates use, operating range, total range and location for
manufactured components.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PRESSURE GAUGES
A.
Manufacturer: Trerice Model 500X.
B.
Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products: Duro 102, Marsh 103, Palmer
40SPDLH, Weksler BM1, Weiss AG-1.
C.
Gauge: ASME B40.1, UL 393 case, bourdon tube, rotary brass movement, brass socket, with
front recalibration adjustment, black scale on white background and pulsation snubber.
1. Size: 4-1/2 inch diameter.
2. Mid-Scale Accuracy: One percent.
3. Scale: Psi.
2.02 PRESSURE GAUGE TAPPINGS
A.
Ball Valve: 1/4 inch, 400 psig WOG, Bronze two piece body, standard port, chrome plated
brass ball, reinforced teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem design, adjustable
packing gland, zinc coated steel lever handle with vinyl hand grip, threaded ends.
2.03 STEM TYPE THERMOMETERS
A.
Manufacturer: Trerice Model AX9.
B.
Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products: Ashcroft 200-36E, Duro 7EZ3-6,
Moeller 706AW, Palmer 9FLA, Weiss 7VS6, Weksler AA5.
2.04 THERMOMETER SUPPORTS
A.
Socket: Brass or stainless steel separable sockets for thermometer stems. Provide cap and
chain where not used to mount permanent instrument or control sensor. Provide lagging
extension when mounted on insulated pipe.
2.05 TEST PLUGS
A.
Manufacturer: FDI Model Super Seal.
B.
Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products: MG Piping Products Co., Sisco,
Trerice, Texas Fairfax, Universal Lancaster.
C.
Test Plug: 1/4 inch or 1/2 inch brass fitting and retained cap for receiving 1/8 inch outside
diameter pressure or temperature probe with neoprene core for temperatures up to 200
degrees F. Provide extra long shaft when mounted on insulated pipe.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
22 0519- 2
METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Provide pressure gauge on incoming side of backflow preventer assemblies. Provide one
pressure gauge downstream from each backflow preventer in accordance with details and
notes.
C.
Install pressure tappings on piping where specified or shown on details. Provide ball valve to
isolate each tapping connection to system. Extend nipples to allow clearance from insulation.
D.
Install gauges and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal operating
level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical. Fill sockets with SAE 10W oil for conduction.
E.
Adjust gauges and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate to
zero.
F.
Locate test plugs adjacent to thermometers, temperature wells, pressure gauges, and where
shown. Install in 1/2 inch pipe opening (minimum), with bushing.
G.
Install test plugs vertical to horizontal. Do not install pointing down.
3.02 SCHEDULES
A.
Stem Pipe Type Thermometers Scale Range:
1. Provide thermometers where shown on details and specified.
2. Domestic hot water supply 30 to 180 degrees F.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
22 0553- 1
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
SECTION 22 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Nameplates
B.
Pipe Markers
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 22 0510- General Plumbing Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS
A.
Water Heater: Nameplates.
B.
Piping: Pipe markers.
C.
Tanks: Nameplates.
2.02 NAMEPLATES
A.
Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters.
B.
Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting
background color.
C.
Size:1/2 inch high letters unless otherwise noted.
2.03 PIPE MARKERS
A.
Manufacturers: Brimar, Seton Name Plate Co Setmark, Kolbi Industries Style A thru E(5 inch
and smaller) else Style F thru H, Marking Services.
B.
Pipe Markers for Indoor Use: Seton Setmark; media indicator with direction-of-flow arrows on
calendared vinyl sheet; snap-around type for pipe sizes to 5-7/8 inches diameter, strap around
type with nylon ties for pipe sizes 6 inches diameter and larger.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply
with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
B.
Identify equipment such as pumps, water heaters, tanks, compressors and enclosed motor
controllers with plastic nameplates.
C.
Install Pipe Markers on all piping systems at the following Locations:
1. Mechanical Equipment Rooms:
a. Within 18 inches of each valve.
b. Within 36 inches of each 90 elbow, tee, connection to equipment or vessel and point
where pipe exits room.
c. At not over 20 feet intervals along all exposed piping.
2. Above Suspended Ceilings:
a. Within 18 inches of each valve or valve assembly.
b. At tees, identify both main and branch within 36 inches of tee.
c. Within 36 inches of each 90 elbow.
d. At not over 30 feet intervals along all concealed piping.
3. Piping Exposed in Rooms Other Than Mechanical Equipment Areas:
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
a.
b.
22 0553- 2
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Omit identification on piping, 1 inch exterior diameter or smaller( insulated or
uninsulated) or exposed at connections to equipment or plumbing fixtures.
With the above exception, identify at not less than one point each piping run visible in
each room, with identification on not over 20 feet intervals.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
22 0719- 1
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
SECTION 22 0719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Piping insulation
B.
Jackets and accessories
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 22 0510 - General Plumbing Requirements
B.
Section 22 0553- Plumbing Piping and Valve Identification
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2007.
B.
ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus; 2010.
C.
ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement; 2007.
D.
ASTM C449 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and
Finishing Cement; 2007.
E.
ASTM C534/C534M - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular
Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2008.
F.
ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2007e1.
G.
ASTM C591 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate
Thermal Insulation; 2009.
H.
ASTM D1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Sponge or Expanded
Rubber; 2007.
I.
ASTM D2842 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2006.
J.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2010b.
K.
ASTM E 136 - Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 F.
L.
NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
National Fire Protection Association 2007.
M. UL 910 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2003.
N.
UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 22 0510 - General Plumbing Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and
thickness for each service, and locations.
C.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable
workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All insulation, mastics, coatings, sealants, and adhesives shall be certified by the manufacturer
to be Asbestos-free.
B.
Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this
section with minimum three years of experience.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
22 0719- 2
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and
thickness.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product.
B.
Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION
A.
Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum,
when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.
2.02 GLASS FIBER (RIGID)
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.
2. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
3. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
B.
Insulation: ASTM C 547 and ASTM C795; semi-rigid, noncombustible, end grain adhered to
jacket.
1. 'K' value: ASTM C 177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F (0.035 at 24 degrees C).
2. Maximum service temperature: 650 degrees F.
3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.
C.
Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.
D.
Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive:
1. Compatible with insulation.
E.
Insulating Cement/Mastic:
1. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
F.
Insulating Cement:
1. ASTM C449/C449M.
2.03 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION
A.
Manufacturers: Armstrong AP, Halstead, JohnsManville, Rubatex.
B.
Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTM C534
Grade 3; use molded tubular material wherever possible.
1. 'K' ('Ksi') value: ASTM C 177; 0.27 at 75 degrees F (0.04 at 24 degrees C).
2. Maximum moisture absorption: ASTM D 1056; 5.0 percent (pipe) by volume, 6.0 percent
(sheet) by volume.
3. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.17 perm-inches, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96.
4. Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 maximum when tested in accordance with
ASTM E84 .
5. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F.
6. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F.
7. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.
C.
Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation.
2.04 JACKETS
A.
ASJ ( All Service Jacket): Factory applied white kraft and foil laminate, reinforced, fire retardant
jacket (ASJ) with self sealing lap and butt strips. Jackets shall meet the requirements of ASTM
C1136.
B.
Glass Fabric Vapor Barrier Finish;
1. Cloth: Untreated 9 oz./sq. yd. weight.
2. Blanket: 1.0 lb/cu ft density.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
3.
4.
5.
22 0719- 3
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
Weave: 5x5.
Lagging Adhesive: Fire resistant compatible with insulation.
Finish: Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, grey color.
2.05 STAPLES, BANDS, AND WIRES
A.
Bands shall be galvanized steel, aluminum, brass, or nickel copper alloy, of 3/4 inch nominal
width. The band thickness exclusive of coating shall be not less than 30 gauge for steel and
nickel copper alloy.
B.
Wire shall be 18-gauge stainless steel.
2.06 ADHESIVES, COATINGS, SEALING COMPOUNDS AND PROTECTIVE FINISHES
A.
Lagging Adhesive and Coating for Glass Cloth Jackets and Other Facings - MIL-A-3316 B,
Class 1.
B.
Lap Adhesive for Vapor Barrier Jacket - MIL-A-3316 B, Class 2.
C.
Bonding Adhesives - for securing insulation to metal surfaces - MIL-A-3316 B, Class 2 for
temperature up to 200 degree F.
D.
Contact Type Adhesive - For installing flexible unicellular insulation - MIL-A-24179, Type II,
Class 1.
E.
Bedding Compound and Joint Sealers - MIL-B-19564A.
F.
Coating Compound - Vapor Barrier Treatment - MIL-C-19565B, Type 1 or II.
G.
Protective Finish Outside of Buildings - Coating Compound MIL-C-19565 B, Type I.
H.
Manufacturers: Childers, Foster, Armstrong, Mon-Eco.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.
B.
Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.
C.
Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. Exterior of
insulation shall be uniform in appearance.
D.
Insulation jacket shall fit snug to insulation.
E.
Domestic Cold Water Piping in Plumbing Chases and Concealed in Non-exterior Walls: Do not
insulate.
F.
Floor Drain Primer: All horizontal piping and vertical piping up to 6" above the finished floor
shall be insulated. Insulate same as Domestic Cold Water where located above slab on grade.
Where located below grade, provide 1-inch thick flexible elastomeric cellular insulation.
G.
Valves and fittings:
1. Insulate pipe and all valves and fittings including valve bonnets on domestic cold water
and domestic hot water piping. Leave only valve stems, open ends of wells and gauge
cocks exposed.
2. All Other Piping: Insulate pipe and fittings, but omit insulation on unions and valves. Taper
insulation ends and cover with coating reinforced with glass cloth.
H.
Insulation at Hangers: Hangers for domestic water and trapeze supports shall be outside of
insulation with saddles as specified herein.
I.
Saddles: Provide galvanized steel saddles at each point where pipe insulation passes through
a hanger or rests on a support. Saddles shall be 180 arc for horizontal piping, 360 arch for
vertical piping. Length and gauge of saddle shall be as follows:
1. 2 inch pipe size and smaller: 18 Gauge saddle, 8 inch long, minimum.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
22 0719- 4
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
J.
Flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation: Install without splitting and under compression
during pipe fabrication. Seal Joints with adhesive. Paint exposed insulation with two coats of
vinyl insulation paint after adhesive has dried for twelve hours, minimum. Allow two hours,
minimum, between coats.
K.
Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish
at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section 22 0510.
L.
Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Finish with ASJ and PVC fitting covers.
3.03 CLEANING
A.
Clean adjacent surfaces, valves, valve handles, etc of jacketing materials.
3.04 SCHEDULES
A.
Plumbing Systems:
1. Domestic Water:
a. Concealed Domestic Hot and Cold Piping:1 inch thick rigid glass fiber with factory
ASJ jacket.
b. Exposed Below 10ft Above Finished Floor Domestic Hot and Cold Piping:1 inch thick
rigid glass fiber with glass fabric vapor barrier jacket.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
22 1005- 1
PLUMBING PIPING
SECTION 22 1005 - PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems.
1. Sanitary sewer
2. Domestic water
3. Valves
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 07 8400 - Firestopping.
B.
Section 22 0510 - General Plumbing Requirements.
C.
Section 22 0553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping.
D.
Section 22 0719 - Plumbing Piping Insulation.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of
Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2005) (ANSI B16.18).
B.
ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The
American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2005).
C.
ASME B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings DWV; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007.
D.
ASME B31.1 - Power Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007
(ANSI/ASME B31.1).
E.
ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2008
(ANSI/ASME B31.9).
F.
ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008.
G.
ASTM B42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes; 2010.
H.
ASTM B75 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube; 2002 (Reapproved 2010).
I.
ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2009.
J.
ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2005.
K.
ASTM B302 - Standard Specification for Threadless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes; 2007.
L.
ASTM B306 - Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV); 2009.
M. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules
40, 80, and 120; 2006.
N.
ASTM D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,
Schedule 40; 2006.
O.
ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Piping Systems; 2004 (Reapproved 2009).
P.
ASTM D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and
Vent Pipe and Fittings; 2010.
Q.
ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings; 1996 (Reapproved 2010).
R.
ASTM D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe
and Fittings; 2008.
S.
ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers; 1992
(Reapproved 2008).
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
22 1005- 2
PLUMBING PIPING
T.
AWS A5.8/A5.8M - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding; American
Welding Society; 2004 and errata.
U.
AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains; American Water Works Association; 2005
(ANSI/AWWA C651).
V.
MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection,
Application, and Installation; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings
Industry, Inc.; 2009.
W. MSS SP-69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application; Manufacturers
Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2003.
X.
MSS SP-70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers
Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2006.
Y.
MSS SP-80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves; Manufacturers Standardization
Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2008.
Z.
MSS SP-89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices;
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2003.
AA. MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends;
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 1996.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 22 0510 - General Plumbing Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide
manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
C.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Refer to Section 22 0510 - General Plumbing Requirements for installer requirements.
B.
Perform Work in accordance with State of Georgia, standards.
C.
Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
D.
Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, ASTM specification,
potable water certification, water pressure rating.
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Perform Work in accordance with State of Georgia plumbing code.
B.
Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices.
C.
Disinfection shall be in accordance with Environmental Protection Division, Georgia Department
of Natural Resources "Rules for Safe Drinking Water".
D.
Domestic water piping system shall be sterilized, complying with Federal Specifications
BB-C-120. Work shall be performed by licensed operator.
E.
Water Sample Certification: Water samples from the sterilized domestic water piping system
shall be tested and approved by the local Health Department.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
B.
Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
C.
Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until
installation.
D.
Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections
of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
22 1005- 3
PLUMBING PIPING
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED AND WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING
A.
PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034.
1. Fittings: PVC.
2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.
2.02 SANITARY SEWER PIPING ABOVE GRADE :
A.
PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665.
1. Fittings: PVC.
2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.
2.03 WATER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING
A.
Pipe Size 2-1/2 inch and Smaller: Copper Pipe: ASTM B 42, hard drawn.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze.
2. Joints: AWS A5.8, BCuP silver braze.
2.04 WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING
A.
Copper Pipe: ASTM B42, Type K hard drawn.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze.
2. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn95 solder.
2.05 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A.
Copper Tube: ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), Type L (B), Drawn (H).
1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze.
2. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn95 solder.
2.06 UNIONS, FLANGES AND COUPLINGS
A.
Unions for Pipe Sizes 3 Inches and Under:
1. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints.
B.
Flanges for Pipe Size Over 1 Inch:
1. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets.
C.
Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder
end, water impervious isolation barrier. Provide where connecting ferrous and non-ferrous
piping.
2.07 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58.
1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate
type using MSS SP-58 recommendations.
2. Overhead Supports: Individual steel rod hangers attached to structure or to trapeze
hangers.
3. Trapeze Hangers: Welded steel channel frames attached to structure.
B.
Manufacturers: Anvil, B-Line, Grinnell, Globe or Michigan. Figure numbers are for Michigan.
C.
Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste, and Vent:
1. Conform to ASME B31.9.
2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split
ring.
3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. Figure 400.
4. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.
5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel
clamp.
6. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
D.
Plumbing Piping - Water:
1. Conform to ASME B31.9.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
22 1005- 4
PLUMBING PIPING
Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, loop.
Figure 100.
Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Copper electroplated carbon steel ,
adjustable, clevis. Figure 402.
Multiple or Trapeze Hangers(Up to 2 inch: Green epoxy coated, cold formed, lipped steel
channels, sized for pipe load and span, 1-5/8" x 1-5/8" x 12 gauge minimum, with
pipe/tubing clamps, elastomer cushion, spring held, hardened steel nuts and hanger rods.
Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.
Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor
flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
2.08 GATE VALVES
A.
Underground Gate Valves: 2 inches and larger
1. Manufacturers:
a. American Flow Control; Model 2500 Series
b. Crane;
c. Nibco;
d. Kitz;
e. Hammond;
f.
Stockham;
g. Watts;
h. Milwaukee Valve;
2. AWWA Resilient Wedge, Iron body, non-rising stem, 250 p.s.i.g. cold water working
pressure, with 2" square operating nut and mechanical joint ends.
2.09 BALL VALVES
A.
Up To and Including 2-1/2 Inches:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Apollo; Model 64 Series
b. Crane; Model 9202
c. Ferguson; Model 421
d. Hammond; Model 8911
e. Kitz; Model 69
f.
Milwaukee; Model BA-485B
g. Watts; Model FBVS-3C
2. MSS SP-110, NSF-61, 150 WSP, 600 WOG, Brass or Bronze two piece body, Full port,
chrome plated brass ball, reinforced teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof
stem design, adjustable packing gland, zinc coated steel lever handle with vinyl hand grip
, Solder ends .
2.10 SWING CHECK VALVES
A.
2-Inches and smaller
1. Manufacturers:
a. Apollo; Model
b. Crane; Model 1340:
c. Hammond Valve; Model IB 912:
d. Kitz; Model #22T
e. Milwaukee Valve; Model 1509
f.
Nibco, Inc; Model S413Y:
g. Stockham; Model B 309Y:
h. Watts; Model B-5001
B.
MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body and cap, bronze swing disc with rubber seat, solder ends
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
22 1005- 5
PLUMBING PIPING
2.11 STRAINERS
A.
Y-type with removable screen; 2 1/2-inch and larger, flanged; 2-inch and smaller, threaded.
Rating 125 PSIG.
B.
Manufacturers:
1. Crane;
2. Armstrong;
3. Keckley;
4. Muessco;
5. Mueller;
6. Conbraco/Apollo; Model 59 Series:
7. Wheatley "YF"
8. Flow Design YC/YW:
C.
Size 2 inch and Under:
1. Threaded brass body for 175 psi CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated
screen.
2. Class 150, threaded bronze body 300 psi CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel
perforated screen.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.
B.
Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
C.
Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Each type of pipe installed shall be by the same manufacturer thorughout the building.
B.
Each type of fittings installed shall be by the same manufacturer throughout the building.
C.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D.
Equipment and pipe support upper attachments shall be 3" x 3" x 1/4" steel angles, minimum,
spanning structural members unless noted otherwise. Provide inserts and bolts for supporting
pipes and equipment from structural members. Attachments shall be to top cord of bar joists.
Attach to beams with beam clamps. DO NOT support from roof deck.
E.
Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
F.
Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to
walls.
G.
Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space.
H.
Maintain 4 inch clearance between pipe and fittings after insulation.
I.
Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
J.
Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of
insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 22 0719.
K.
Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of
access doors with Architect.
L.
Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 3 ft of cover.
M. Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly.
N.
Flush all debris and pipe compound from domestic water system.
O.
Install valves in a readily accessible location.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
22 1005- 6
PLUMBING PIPING
P.
Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
Q.
Install water piping to ASME B31.9.
R.
PVC Pipe: Make solvent-welded joints in accordance with ASTM D2855.
S.
Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors. Where pipes pass thru exterior walls,
seal opening between sleeve and pipe.
T.
Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9.
2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and
adjacent work.
4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
5. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe
movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
6. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or
trapeze hangers.
7. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.
8. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping where hanger is in contact
with tubing.
9. Prime coat concealed steel hangers and supports not provided with a corrosion resistant
finish. Refer to Section 09 9000.
10. Support drainage piping within 12 inches of every joint.
3.04 APPLICATION
A.
Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
B.
Install gate or ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers
as shown on drawings.
3.05 TOLERANCES
A.
Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within 1/2 inch vertically of location indicated and
slope to drain at minimum of 1/8 inch per foot slope.
B.
Interior Water Piping: Maintain top of piping level with concentric reducers. Arrange to drain at
low points.
3.06 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
A.
Disinfect water distribution system in accordance with Section 33 1300.
B.
Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.
C.
Ensure Ph of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda
ash) or acid (hydrochloric).
D.
Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to
obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual.
E.
Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15
percent of outlets.
F.
Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.
G.
If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.
H.
Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L.
I.
Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water
entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.
3.07 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A.
General: Prior to excavation for or installation of any piping, determine location, invert and size
at connection. Advise the Engineer of any discrepancies discovered.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
22 1005- 7
PLUMBING PIPING
B.
Sanitary Sewer: Connect as shown. Pay all costs.
C.
Provide new water service complete with approved double check backflow preventer and, and
sand strainer located inside the building.
D.
Utilities Impact Fees: the Contractor shall pay utility(s) impact fees, if any, relating to this
project.
3.08 SCHEDULES
A.
Hanger spacing indicated as maximum span based on pipe material and size. Conform to
structural spacing and load capacity of structural support points and provide closer spacing as
required.
B.
Pipe Hanger Spacing:
1. Metal Piping:
a. Copper Pipe size: 1/2 inches to 1-1/4 inches:
1) Maximum hanger spacing: 5 ft.
2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inches.
b. Copper Pipe size: 1-1/2 inches to 4 inches:
1) Maximum hanger spacing: 8 ft.
2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inch.
2. Plastic Piping:
a. All Sizes:
1) Maximum hanger spacing: 5 ft.
2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inch.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
22 1006- 1
PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
SECTION 22 1006 - PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Floor Drains
B.
Cleanouts
C.
Hose Bibbs
D.
Hydrants
E.
Backflow Preventers
F.
Water hammer arrestors
G.
Trap Primers
H.
Trap Sealer Assembly
I.
Flashing
J.
Valve Box
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 22 0510 - General Plumbing Requirements
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASME A112.6.3 - Floor and Trench Drains; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;
2001 (R2007).
B.
ASME A112.26.1M - Water Hammer Arrestors; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 1984.
C.
ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers; American Society of Sanitary Engineering;
2004 (ANSI/ASSE 1011).
D.
ASSE 1012 - Backflow Preventer with Intermediate Atmospheric Vent; American Society of
Sanitary Engineering; 2002 (ANSI/ASSE 1012).
E.
ASSE 1019 - Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants, Freeze Resistant Automatic Draining Type;
American Society of Sanitary Engineering; 2004, and Errata 2005 (ANSI/ASSE 1019).
F.
PDI-WH 201 - Water Hammer Arresters; Plumbing and Drainage Institute; 2006.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 22 0510 - General Plumbing Requirements, for submittal requirements.
B.
Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.
C.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment, cleanouts, floor drains,
backflow preventers, piping and valves.
D.
Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in
this section with not less than three years documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
1. Two loose keys for outside hose bibs.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FLOOR DRAINS
A.
Floor Drain (FD-A): In Finished Spaces
1. Manufacturers:
a. Mifab; Model F1100C-S(P)-1
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
2.
B.
22 1006- 2
PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
b. J. R. Smith; Model 2005L(B)
c. Wade; Model 1100G(TY)
d. Watts; Model FD-100-M-P
e. Zurn; Model ZN415S(NL)
ASME A112.6.3; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, weep
holes, reversible clamping collar, square, adjustable nickel-bronze strainer.
Floor Drain (FD-B): In Mechanical Spaces
1. Manufacturers:
a. Josam; Model 32300V-50-69-1
b. Mifab; Model F1340-Y-14
c. J. R. Smith; Model 2131L-P050-B-NB
d. Wade; Model 1210(TY)-1-27
e. Watts; Model FD-340-Y-P
2. ASME A112.6.3; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, weep
holes, reversible clamping collar, and adjustable round nickel bronze strainer with
removable perforated sediment bucket and trap primer connection.
2.02 CLEANOUTS
A.
General Cleanouts at Exterior Unsurfaced Areas (GCO):
1. Manufacturers:
a. Josam; Model 58190-22
b. Mifab; Model C-1230
c. J.R. Smith; Model 4283S
d. Watts; Model CO-200
e. Zurn; Model Z1449
2. Line type cast iron cleanout with spigot outlet.
B.
Cleanouts at Interior Finished Floor Areas (FCO):
1. Manufacturers:
a. Josam; Model 55000
b. Mifab; Model C-1100P-R
c. J.R. Smith; Model 4032L
d. Watts; Model
e. Zurn; Model ZN1400-NL-BP
2. Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, flashing clamp and round adjustable
secured Nickel Bronze top assembly with bronze plug and round gasketed scored cover in
service areas and round gasketed depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor
areas.
C.
Cleanouts at End of Line (ECO):
1. Manufacturers:
a. Josam
b. Mifab; Model
c. J.R. Smith; Model
d. Watts; Model
e. Zurn; Model
2. Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, flashing clamp and round adjustable
secured Nickel Bronze top assembly with bronze plug and round gasketed scored cover in
service areas and round gasketed depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor
areas.
D.
Cleanouts at Interior Finished Wall Areas (WCO):
1. Manufacturers:
a. Josam; Model 58600
b. Mifab; Model C-1430-RD
c. J.R. Smith; Model 4472
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
2.
22 1006- 3
PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
d. Watts; Model CO-590-RD
e. Zurn; Model Z-1468
Line type with cast bronze taper threaded plug with round stainless steel access cover
secured with machine screw.
2.03 HOSE BIBBS
A.
Interior Hose Bibbs:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Nibco; Model 763VB-LS
b. Prier:
c. Woodford; Model 24P
2. Brass body with integral mounting flange, replaceable hexagonal disc, hose thread spout,
chrome plated where exposed with lockshield and removable key, integral vacuum
breaker in conformance with ASSE 1011. Rough brass finish in mechanical spaces.
2.04 HYDRANTS
A.
Wall Hydrants: Surface mounted.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Josam; Model 71050
b. Prier;
c. Wade; Model 8600
d. Watts; Model HY-420
e. Woodford; Model 65
f.
Zurn; Model Z-1321
2. ASSE 1019; freeze resistant, self-draining type with chrome plated wall plate hose thread
spout, lockshield and removable key, and integral vacuum breaker.
2.05 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A.
Double Check Valve Assemblies:
1. Manufacturers: (3/4-inch - 2-inch)
a. Apollo/Conbraco; Model 40-100
b. Febco; Model 850 (Small Diameter)
c. Watts; Model 007QT-S
d. Wilkins; Model 950XL.
2. ASSE 1015; Bronze body with corrosion resistant internal parts and stainless steel
springs; two independently operating check valves with two quarter turn full port ball
valves and a bronze wye type strainer.
2.06 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
A.
Manufacturers: Unit Size: 'A'
1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company; Model 5005.
2. Watts Regulator Company; Model 15-1/2".
3. Mifab; Model WHB-A
4. Souix Chief; Model 652-A.
5. Josam; Model 75001.
6. Wade; Model W-5.
7. Wilkins; Model 1250-A
8. Zurn Industries, Inc; Model 1700-100.
B.
Manufacturers: Unit Size: 'B'
1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company; Model 5010.
2. Watts Regulator Company; Model 15*-3/4".
3. Mifab; Model WHB-B
4. Souix Chief; Model 653-B.
5. Josam; Model 75002.
6. Wade; Model W-10.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
7.
8.
C.
22 1006- 4
PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
Wilkins; Model 1250-B
Zurn Industries, Inc; Model 1700-200.
Water Hammer Arrestors:
1. ANSI A112.26.1M Stainless steel construction, bellows type sized in accordance with PDIWH 201, precharged suitable for operation in temperature range -100 to 300 degrees F
and maximum 250 psi working pressure. Locate valve(s) above ceiling height of adjacent
space.
2.07 TRAP PRIMERS
A.
Single Primer:
1. Cast brass unit with built-in air gap/backflow preventer, 1/2 inch inlet and 1/2 inch outlets.
2. Manufacturers: Precision Plumbing Products (PPP) PR-500, Mifab M-500 w/MI-GAP.
3. See detail on plans.
B.
Multiple Trap Primer:
1. Trap Primer Valve: Brass trap primer valve with O-ring seals and integral vacuum breaker.
Adjustable from 2 oz. to 5 oz. flow rate.
2. Distribution Unit: Brass body with clear plastic inspection cover top and 2 distribution
opening(s) in the bottom.
3. Manufacturers: Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. (PPP) PR-500 w/DU-2/3/4, Mifab M-500
w/MI-GAP and MI-DU. Pipe per manufacturer's instructions.
4. See detail on plans.
2.08 TRAP SEALER ASSEMBLY
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Sure Seal
2. Proset
B.
Inline elastomeric material waterless trap protection. Size to match drain.
C.
Ten year warranty
2.09
2.10 FLASHING
A.
Plastic Pipe Vents Thru Roof: Neoprene flashing collar.
B.
Workmanship: Flashing materials shall be free of holes and splits, and all joints and seams
shall be sealed watertight with solder.
2.11 VALVE BOX
A.
Two piece, cast iron, round, adjustable cast iron extension with identification of service on
cover. Archway bottom of plastic. Anniston Foundry Co., U.S. Pipe Co. or Clow.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install plumbing specialties in a readily accessible location.
C.
Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with
mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage
system.
D.
Encase exterior cleanouts in 6-inch concrete pad flush with grade. See detail.
E.
Install 2-way cleanouts at all sanitary sewer and storm drain pipes exiting the building. Refer to
detail on drawings.
F.
Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.
G.
Floor drains shall be set at 1/8-inch below finish floor elevation. Refer to Architectural for
sloping of floor.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
22 1006- 5
PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
H.
Install approved potable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of
domestic water may occur; on boiler feed water lines, fire sprinkler systems, and irrigation
systems.
I.
Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold water
supply piping to , , all fixtures and toilet batteries. Size and install in accordance with the
(Plumbing and Drainage Institute Standard) PDI WH-201.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
22 3000- 1
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
SECTION 22 3000 - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Water Heaters
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 22 0510 - General Plumbing Requirements
B.
Section 22 0519 - Gages and Meters
C.
Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association 2005.
B.
UL 174 - Standard for Household Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters; Underwriters
Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
C.
UL 1453 - Standard for Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters;
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 22 0510 - General Plumbing Requirements for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data:
1. Provide dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to
other equipment and piping.
2. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
C.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of water heaters and components.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Include operation, maintenance, and inspection data,
replacement part numbers and availability, and service depot location and telephone number.
E.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in the
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
F.
Certificate: Provide Manufacturer's start-up certificate certifying the unit is installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products
specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.
B.
Standards: Ensure products and installation of specified products are in conformance with
recommendations and requirements of the following organizations:
1. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA).
2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
1.06 CERTIFICATIONS
A.
Water Heaters: NSF approved.
B.
Electric Water Heaters: UL listed and labeled to UL 174 or UL 1453.
C.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories
Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.
1.08 WARRANTY
A.
Provide warrantys from date of Final Completion.
B.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
C.
Provide 10 year manufacturer warranty for domestic water heaters.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
22 3000- 2
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WATER HEATERS
2.02 RESIDENTIAL ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
A.
RESIDENTIAL TYPE ELECTRIC STORAGE WATER HEATERS (Two Required)
1. Manufacturers:
a. Marathon
2. Type: Automatic, electric, vertical storage, Floor mounted
3. Performance:
a. Storage capacity: 50 gal.
b. Heating element size: 4.5 kW
c. Number of heating elements: 2
d. Minimum recovery rate: 20.5 gph with 90 degrees F temperature rise.
e. Maximum working pressure: 150 psig.
4. Electrical Characteristics:
a. See Electrical.
5. Tank: Seamless blow molded polybutene tank with factory installed vacuum relief
valve, thermally insulated with non-CFC foam insulation; encased in filament wound
fiberglass outer tank.
6. Controls: Automatic water thermostat with externally adjustable temperature range from
110 to 170 degrees F, low watt-density coated elements, Factory installed manual reset
energy cut-off. Cold water inlet sediment reducing device.
7. Accessories: Provide:
a. Top Water Connections: Brass.
b. Dip tube: High temperature, commercial-grade.
c. Drain Valve.
d. Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve
e. See detail on drawing.
2.03 DIAPHRAGM-TYPE COMPRESSION TANKS (TWO REQUIRED)
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Amtrol Inc: www.amtrol.com.
2. ITT Bell & Gossett: www.bellgossett.com.
3. Taco, Inc: www.taco-hvac.com.
B.
Accessories: Pressure gage and air-charging fitting, tank drain; precharge to 12 psig.
C.
Size: 8 inches diameter, 12 inches overall length, 2 gal capacity.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install plumbing equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as required by code,
and complying with conditions of certification, if any.
B.
Provide dielectric unions between the distribution piping and the cold and hot water connection
piping provided with the water heater.
C.
Coordinate with plumbing piping and related electrical work to achieve operating system.
D.
Domestic Water Heaters:
1. Install water heater on concrete housekeeping base, sized minimum 4 inches larger than
heater base. Refer to Section 22 0510.
2. Pipe relief valves full size down to nearest floor drain and elbow down into drain.
3. Provide piping connections and accessories as indicated.
4. Provide for connection to electrical service. Refer to Section 26 2717.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
22 3000- 3
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
3.02 STARTING EQUIPMENT.
A.
Provide start up certificate.
B.
Demonstrate water heater operation and verify specified performance.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
22 4010- 1
PLUMBING FIXTURES
SECTION 22 4010 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Water closets (WC)
B.
Urinals (UR)
C.
Counter Mounted Lavatories (LV)
D.
Shower Assembly (SH)
E.
Washing Machine Box (WB)
F.
Drinking Fountains (DF)
G.
Plumbing Fixtures' Fittings, Accessories, and Supplies
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures
B.
Section 01 6000 - Product requirements
C.
Section 01 7800 Closeout Submittals
D.
Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Seal fixtures to walls and floors.
E.
Section 22 0510 - General Plumbing Requirements
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
ARI 1010 - Self-Contained, Mechanically-Refrigerated Drinking-Water Coolers; Air-Conditioning
and Refrigeration Institute; 1994.
B.
ASME A112.6.1M - Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use; The American
Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1997.
C.
ASME A112.18.1 - Plumbing Fixture Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;
2000.
D.
ASME A112.19.2M - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 1998.
E.
ASME A112.19.5 - Trim for Water-Closet Bowls, Tanks and Urinals; The American Society of
Mechanical Engineers; 1999.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 22 0510 - General Plumbing Requirements for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes,
trim, and finishes.
C.
Samples: Submit two lavatory supply fittings.
D.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation methods and procedures.
E.
Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists.
F.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in the
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.05 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Provide five year manufacturer warranty for electric water cooler from Final Observation.
1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
See Section 01 6000 - Project Requirements.
B.
Supply 1 extra cartridge kit per waterless urinal.
C.
Supply two sets of faucet washers.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
22 4010- 2
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FLUSH VALVE WATER CLOSETS
A.
FIXTURE 'WC1'; WATER CLOSET (FM, FV(1.28 gpf), STD)
1. Bowl:
a. Manufacturers:
1) American Standard Inc; Model 2234.528: www.americanstandard.com.
2) Kohler Company; Model K-4406: www.kohlerco.com.
3) Toto; Model CT705EN
b. ASME 112.19.2M; 1.28gpf, floor mounted vitreous china closet bowl, with elongated
rim, 1-1/2 inch top spud, china bolt caps; standard accessible.
2. Provide floor drain trap primer connection off flush valve tailpiece: Primer assembly shall
be furnished complete with trap primer collar 3/8" x 12" supply tube and fittings, vacuum
breaker, vacuum breaker tube nut, 1 1/2" flush tube and wall escutcheon. See plans for
location and pipe routing.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Zurn; Model (TPO)
2) Sloan; Model (VBF-72-A1)
3) Delany; Model ( T38)
3. Fixture Accessories:
a. Seat: Type 1St; See SEATS.
b. Flush Valve (1.28gpf): Type 14FV; See FLUSH VALVES.
B.
FIXTURE 'WC2'; WATER CLOSET (FM, FV (1.28 gpf), ADA)
1. Bowl:
a. Manufacturers:
1) American Standard; Model 3461.528
2) Kohler; Model K-4405
3) Toto; Model CT705ELN
b. ASME A112.19.2M; 1.28 gpf, floor mounted vitreous china closet bowl, with
elongated rim, 1-1/2 inch top spud, china bolt caps; disabled access.
2. Provide floor drain trap primer connection off flush valve tailpiece: Primer assembly shall
be furnished complete with trap primer collar 3/8" x 12" supply tube and fittings, vacuum
breaker, vacuum breaker tube nut, 1 1/2" flush tube and wall escutcheon. See plans for
location and pipe routing.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Zurn; Model (TPO)
2) Sloan; Model (VBF-72-A1)
3) Delany; Model ( T38)
3. Fixture Accessories:
a. Seat: Type 1St; See SEATS.
b. Flush Valve (1.28gpf): Type 14FV; See FLUSH VALVES.
2.02 URINALS
A.
FIXTURE 'UR1'; URINAL (WH, VC, Waterless, ADA)
1. Urinal:
a. Manufacturers:
1) Falcon; Model F-1000
2) Sloan; Model WES-1000
b. ASME A112.19.2M; waterless (no-flush), vitreous china, wall hung urinal fixture with
integral trap, replaceable sealant cartridge, wall brackets; disabled accessible.
2. Urinal Carrier: See CARRIERS.
2.03 COUNTER MOUNTED LAVATORIES
A.
FIXTURE 'LV1'; LAVATORY (CT, ADA)
1. Lavatory Basin/ countertop provided under architectural section.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
2.
22 4010- 3
PLUMBING FIXTURES
Accessories:
a. Faucet: Type 4bF; See FAUCETS.
b. Drain: Type 2D; See DRAINS.
c. Supplies: See SUPPLY STOPS.
d. Trap: Type 1T; See TRAPS.
e. Insulation: See FIXTURE INSULATION.
2.04 SHOWER ASSEMBLIES
A.
FIXTURE 'SH1'; SHOWER ASSEMBLY (WH, STD)
1. Shower Valve Assembly:
a. Manufacturers:
1) Leonard Valve;
2) Speakman;
3) Symmons; Model 96-1-295
4) Zurn;
b. ASME A112.18.1M chrome plated brass with brass body, pressure balanced valve
with built-in check stops, adjustable stop screw, chrome escutcheon and anchor
plate. Polished chrome vandal resistant shower head at 30 degree angle with
adjustable spray, mounting brackets and fasteners; 2.0 gpm flow restrictor.
2. Shower Enclosure:
a. Provided under Architectural; See PLANS.
3. Accessories:
B.
FIXTURE 'SH2'; SHOWER ASSEMBLY (WH, ADA)
1. Shower Valve Assembly:
a. Manufacturers:
1) Leonard Valve;
2) Powers;
3) Speakman;
4) Symmons; Model 96-1-295 w/ 4-458 diverter valve.
5) Zurn;
b. ASME A112.18.1M chrome plated brass with brass body, pressure balanced valve
with built-in check stops, adjustable stop screw, chrome escutcheon and anchor
plate. 2 polished chrome vandal resistant shower heads at 30 degree angle with
adjustable spray, mounting brackets and fasteners; 2.0 gpm flow restrictor. lever type
diverter valve, in-line vacuum breaker. See fixture schedule and Architectural
elevations for shower head mounting heights.
2. Shower Enclosure:
a. Provided under Architectural; See PLANS.
3. Accessories:
a. Drain: 8D.
2.05 MISCELLANEOUS FIXTURES
A.
FIXTURE 'WB1'; WASHING MACHINE BOX
1. Washing Machine Box Assembly
a. Manufacturers:
1) Guy-Gray; Model FB200
2) Water-Tite; Model MWB-1
b. 20-gauge white powder-coated metal box, pre-punched, sloped to drain, 2-inch
connection, 1/2"-inch FIP hose angle valves; with 18-gauge white powder-coated
metal face frame/flange.
2.06 DRINKING FOUNTAINS
A.
FIXTURE 'DF1' ; (FROST RESISTANT DRINKING FOUNTAIN)
1. Water Cooler
a. Manufacturers:
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
2.
22 4010- 4
PLUMBING FIXTURES
1) Elkay; Model EDFP217FPK
2) Haws; Model 1119FR
3) Acorn Aqua; Model A152400B-FRA4
b. ARI-1010; Non-refrigerated, frost-resistant Hi-Lo drinking fountain. Stainless steel
modular type assembly with rectangular bowls, heavy duty galvanized steel mounting
frame, Fountain is activated by front push button. Chrome plated vandal-resistant
bubbler head with anti-squirt and shielded. Plumbing box containing an air operated
valve and drain system shall be included for remote mounting in heated area. Wall
panel and mounting bracket shall be included with the fountain. CFC lead free. Refer
to fixture schedule for mounting heights.
Accessories:
a. Supply: See SUPPLY STOPS
b. Trap: Type 1T; See TRAPS
c. Carriers: Mounting frame provided with unit.
B.
2.07 FIXTURE ACCESSORIES
A.
FLUSH VALVES
1. Type 14FV (1.28 GPM Standard & ADA Electronic Water Closet Valve- Piston Type)
a. Manufacturers:
1) Sloan;
2) Toto Model; Sensor HET Flush Valve-1.28
b. ASME A112.18.1; Exposed chrome plated piston type with 6VDC-4AA battery
powered infrared sensor operated flush valve or hydropowered piston valve with
heavy duty cast escutcheon with set screw, integral screwdriver stop, vacuum
breaker; 1 1/2 inch top spud, 11 1/2-inches high; 1 solid-ring supports; 1.28 gpf
maximum flush.
B.
SEATS
1. Type 1St.; Seat (Elongated, open front, less lid, white)
a. Manufacturers:
1) Bemis; Model 1655SSC
2) Beneke; Model 527SS
3) Kohler; Model K-4666-S-C
4) Church; Model 9500SSC
5) Centoco; Model 1500 series
6) Zurn; Model Z-5955-SS-LL
b. Extra heavy weight, injection molded solid plastic, open-front, less lid, molded
bumpers, external check hinges and stainless steel posts.
C.
FAUCETS
1. Type 4bF (Electronic with standard spout - Lavatories w/ 4" centers)
a. Manufacturers:
1) American Standard; Model 6055.205 w/ 605XTMV and 605P.400
2) Speakman; Model S-8711-BO-TMV
3) Symmons; Model S-6080-2(TMV)
4) Zurn; Model Z-6913-TMV-CP4
5) Toto; Model TEL5DAC-10
6) Sloan; SF-2450-4 w/MIX-135
b. ASME A112.18.1M; Chrome plated brass electronic supply fitting with below deck
thermostatic mixing valve, Battery powered solenoid operator and infrared sensor,
laminar flow spout end, 0.5 gpm; cover plate; less grid drain.
D.
DRAINS
1. Type 2D (Flat grid off-set drain - Lavatories)
a. Manufacturers:
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
b.
22 4010- 5
PLUMBING FIXTURES
1) Dearborn; Model 760W
2) EBC; Model SG7WC
3) Kohler; Model K-13885
4) McGuire; Model 155-WC
5) Sanitary-Dash; Model R7308
6) Zurn; Model Z-8746
ASME A112.18.1M; 1 1/4" inch diameter chrome plated brass flat grid type drain with
offset 17-gauge tailpiece.
E.
SUPPLY STOPS
1. Type SS2 (3/8"-inch, 1/4 turn metal-to-metal; brass cross handle; Lavatories/Sinks)
a. Manufacturers:
1) Kohler; Model K-7605-P
2) Chicago; Model 1019-CP-633
b. ASME A112.18.1M; Chrome plated brass angle heavy duty stop with metal-to-metal
seat with cross-type handle; supply tubing and escutcheon plate.
2. Type SS14 (3/8"-inch, 1/4 turn metal-to-metal; brass cross handle; Electric Water Coolers)
a. Manufacturers:
1) Kohler; Model K-7637
2) Chicago; Model 1019-CP-633
b. ASME A112.18.1M; Chrome plated brass angle heavy duty stop with metal-to-metal
seat with cross-type handle; supply tubing and escutcheon plate.
F.
TRAPS
1. Type 1T (1 1/4"-inch Adj. 'P')
a. Manufacturers:
1) EBC; Model TA-125-CF
2) Dearborn; Model 707 DFBN
3) Kohler; Model K-9000
4) McGuire; Model 8872
5) Zurn; Model Z-8700
b. ASME A112.18.1M; Chrome plated cast brass, 17-gauge P-trap assembly with cast
brass nuts, cleanout plug and heavy duty escutcheon.
G.
CARRIERS
1. Urinals
a. Type C9
1) Manufacturers:
(a) Josam; Model 17800-63
(b) JR Smith; Model 636-M31
(c) Mifab; Model MC-31
(d) Wade; Model W-400-M36
(e) Watts; Model CA-311-Std.
(f) Zurn; Model Z-1221
2. Water Coolers
a. Type C13 'Bi-Level'
1) Manufacturers:
(a) Josam; Model 17560-WCBL
(b) JR Smith; Model 834LR-M31
(c) Mifab; Model MC-33
(d) Wade; Model 440
(e) Watts; Model CA-431-1
(f) Zurn; Model ZR-1225-BL
3. Carrier Notes:
a. Carriers shall be manufactured in accordance with ASME A112.18.2 standards.
b. All carriers shall be bolted to the floor with lag bolts.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
c.
d.
H.
22 4010- 6
PLUMBING FIXTURES
All urinal and water cooler supports shall have heavy duty rectangular supports.
Carriers shall be provided where fixture is mounted on chase wall or mechanical
room wall.
FIXTURE INSULATION
1. Manufacturers:
a. EBC; Model 1K Series
b. McGuire; Model 'Pro-Wrap' Series
c. Plumberex; Model Pro-2000 Series
d. True-Bro; Model 'Lav Guard' Series
e. Zurn; Model 'Trap Wrap' Series
2. Insulation assembly shall be for supply stops & tubing; drains (including off-sets) and
P-traps under all ADA lavatories and counter sinks.
3. ANSI A117.1, ADA4.19.4; Fully molded, anti-bacterial flexible vinyl insulation assembly,
minimum 1/8"-inch wall thickness, white in color, self-extinguishing meeting ASTM D635,
and have a K-value of 1.17.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures.
B.
Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top
lavatories and sinks.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture
rough-in schedule for particular fixtures.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.
B.
Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with cross handle stops, reducers,
and escutcheons, as specified in Fixture Accessories.
C.
Install components level and plumb.
D.
Install and secure fixtures in place with wall supports and bolts.
E.
Seal wall and floor mounted fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with silicon latex tile grout. Joints
shall be finished smooth and flush, not depressed. Color to match fixture.
F.
Solidly attach water closets to closet flange with solid brass bolts, washers and nuts. Provide
wax ring sealant on closet flange. Lead flashing shall not be used.
G.
Waterless urinals shall be last fixture to be installed. Maximum one month before owner take
over. Coordinate with general contractor. Prevent usage of fixture.
H.
Pipe runout from urinal to waste stack shall be Brass or Schedule 40 PVC piping. Copper
piping shall not be used.
3.04 INTERFACE WITH WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A.
Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before
rough-in and installation.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or
overflow.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
22 4010- 7
PLUMBING FIXTURES
3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.
B.
Do not permit use of fixtures.
3.07 SCHEDULES
A.
Refer to Fixture Schedule on plans for mounting heights and piping connections.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
23 0510- 1
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 23 0510 - GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Definitions
B.
Quality Assurance Requirements and Installer Qualifications.
C.
General Product Delivery and Storage.
D.
Installer Warranty.
E.
Submittal Procedures Supplementing Section 01 3000.
F.
Operating and Maintenance Manuals
G.
Execution Requirements common to Division 23 systems
H.
Starting equipment and Systems-General Requirements.
I.
Cleaning Requirements.
J.
Finishing Requirements
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Section 01 7000 - Execution Requirements, for additional submittal and warranty requirements.
C.
Section 07 8400 - Fire Stop Systems.
D.
Section 07 9000 - Joint Sealers.
E.
Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A.
Manufacturer's Representatives: Wherever MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE is
referred to in this division, said representative shall be regularly employed by the manufacturer
to perform similar activities to those called for herein, which indicates his competence in that
field of work.
B.
Concealed: Where the word concealed is used in this Division, it shall mean items above
ceilings, in attics, in crawl spaces, in chases, in tunnels, in cabinet work, and under counters or
equipment so as to be not visible from an elevation of 5 feet at a horizontal distance of 10 feet.
C.
Finished Spaces or Areas: Where finished spaces or areas are referred to in this Division, it
shall mean all spaces except concealed spaces, mechanical rooms, or boiler rooms unless
otherwise noted.
D.
Provide: Furnish and install.
E.
Control and Interlock Wiring: All wiring, both line voltage and low voltage, other than power
wiring from an electrical distribution panel, through the primary control device, to the item of
equipment.
F.
Primary Control Device: That ONE device for any item of equipment which interrupts power
flow during normal operation. Where magnetic starters are provided, they are the primary
control. For items not switches by starters, the primary control device will be that ONE
thermostat, time clock, manual switch, aquastat, P.E. switch, or relay performing the primary
switching.
G.
Diagrammatic: A drawing that shows arrangement and relations (as of parts).i.e: A
diagrammatic drawing uses symbols rather than pictorial representation of pipes, ducts, conduit
and other items shown and is not necessarily to scale. Arrangement, location, and sizes shown
are firm.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
23 0510- 2
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
H.
Readily Accessible: Items requiring maintenance shall be available for close approach for
maintenance or use in a space, through an access door from floor elevation, or above a lay-in
ceiling though an access point by maintenance staff safely standing on a ladder no taller than
the ceiling.
I.
Noted, Indicated or Shown: Where the terms "Noted", "Indicated" or "Shown" are used in these
specifications, the words "in the specifications or on the plans" shall be inferred.
J.
Detail: Where reference is made to a Detail, the Detail shall be on the plans unless otherwise
noted.
K.
Specifications: Where reference is made to these specifications, it shall be inferred in this
Division of specifications.
L.
Notification by the Contractor, and Instructions to the Contractor: Where reference is made in
these specifications to notification by or instructions given to the Contractor, it shall be inferred
that the Engineer shall be the instructor or shall be notified, as the case exists.
M. Division or Section Reference: Where reference is made to another Division or Section within
this Division, refer to specifications table of contents for Division, Section, or Page Number.
N.
Flow Diagram: A single-line, two-dimension, non-scaled drawing depicting arrangement and
sequence of equipment, valves, controls, thermometers, gauges, and other specialty devices in
a pipe or duct system.
1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Where requirements of these specifications exceed specified codes and ordinances, conform to
these specifications.
B.
Materials and equipment included in Underwriters Label Service shall bear that label. Electrical
equipment shall be U.L. approved as installed.
C.
Permits and Codes: Refer to the General Conditions.
D.
Fire Prevention Precautions in Cutting and Welding Areas: Conform to Article 2605 Fire
Prevention Precautions, Georgia State Minimum Standard Fire Prevention Code (International
Fire Code), 2006 Edition, with 2007 & 2010 Georgia State Amendments, for all work involving
cutting and welding.
E.
HVAC: Conform to the Georgia State Minimum Standard Mechanical Code (International
Mechanical Code), 2006 edition with 2007, 2008, 2010, 2011, & 2012 Georgia State
Amendments.
F.
Energy: Conform to the Georgia State Energy Code for Buildings (International Energy
Conservation Code), 2009 Edition, with 2011 & 2012 Georgia State Amendments.
G.
Electrical: Refer to Division 26. Conform to the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70, 2011.
H.
Building Code: Conform to the Georgia State Minimum Standard Building Code (International
Building Code), 2006 Edition with 2007, 2009 & 2010 Amendments.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
Supplementing Division 1 administrative requirements; the Contractor shall:
1. Assemble the submittal data in compete sets in hard back three-ring binders, separated
by trade, and bound with numbered index sheets and tabs by Specification Sections.
Submittal data shall be submitted at one time unless unavailable data such as control
submittal would delay project progress. Data shall include capacities, complete installation
instructions, dimensional data and electrical data, BHP, motor HP, operating weights and
load distribution at mounting points.
2. Identify all submittals by a cover sheet showing project name, specification section,
drawing or detail number, room number, date, revision date, contractor and
subcontractor's organization and project manager with phone number, the model, style
and size of item being submitted with manufacturers' representative, salesman (or a
preparer who can answer questions), and Preparer's phone number.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
23 0510- 3
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
Prepare a master list of submittal proposed to be submitted on the project. This list shall
be updated for each submission and shall be the first sheet(s) of the submission in the
quantity that is submitted for review. The information and general format shall contain a
Tab number, Item Description, Item Status and any comment.
Review the submittal data and check to ensure compliance with specifications prior to
submitting.
a. The Contractor agrees that submittals of equipment and material and shop drawings
of equipment and material layouts required under provisions of these specifications
and processed by the Engineer are not Change Orders. The purpose of submittals is
to demonstrate that the Contractor understands the design concept of the project by
indicating the equipment and materials he intends to furnish and install, and by
detailing the installation he intends to achieve.
b. The Contractor shall conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents unless
a change order is issued. The Contractor shall identify on each submittal and in letter
form to the Engineer any and all deviations from the Contract Documents.
c. Any submittal or shop drawing not conforming to the Contract Documents without this
identification and notification shall be assumed to be marked "Revise and Resubmit" (
acknowledges this by the submission), and the Contractor shall promptly resubmit
said submittal so as to be in full compliance with the Contract Documents.
d. Failure of the Contractor to provide this information during the shop drawing phase
shall make the Contractor responsible for all changes to achieve compliance with the
Contract Documents without additional compensation.
Provide a Letter from the HVAC Contractor stating that they have checked all submittals
for compliance with specifications.
Product Data:
a. Provide data specific to the Product proposed indicating capacity data, all standard
and optional features to be supplied and all accessories and options available for that
product.
b. Manufacturers' standard drawings shall be modified by deletions or additions to show
only items applicable to this project.
c. Manufacturer's standard drawings shall be modified by deletions or additions to show
only items applicable to this project.
Deliver submittals to the Engineer at the business address.
Paperless delivery of submittal
a. Submittal data may be posted to NBP's FTP site when agreed upon by the Engineer
and the Owner during preconstruction. the Contractor will be provided with a project
folder and a password.
b. Prepare the submittals as described above. Take steps to reduce submittal file size.
c. Do not scan in color or high resolution unless needed for clarity.
d. Ensure any reproductions are legible.
e. Send an email to submittal@nbpengineers.com with a copy to the HVAC engineer
identified during the preconstruction phase.
f.
Identify the submittal in the email subject line using the official project title,
specification section and submitted item. I.E. Project No. G-xxx, Addition to
Administrative Building-Section 230548-Vibration and Seismic Controls.
g. Ensure the submittal posted to the FTP site has the same identification.
h. NBP engineers will not process or react to submittals not properly sent or identified.
Tabulation of Power Wiring Requirements: Within 60 Days of the Notice to Proceed, provide a
Tabulation of Power Wiring Requirements of all proposed equipment, including H.P., amps,
voltage, phase and KW, tabulated on a separate sheet. A copy of the tabulation shall be
transmitted independently to the Contractor, the Engineer and to all affected trades. (Refer to
Electrical Drawings for electrical provisions for equipment.)
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
C.
23 0510- 4
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
Warranty: Submit the HVAC installer's warranty letter addressed to the Owner stating the
correct project name and number, if applicable, the warranty period and ensure that form has
the correct date of the Final Observation.
1.06 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Three (3) bound and indexed Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be prepared by the
Contractor for all equipment and be submitted for approval a minimum of prior to the Final
Inspection. Two (2) approved copies shall be delivered to the operating personnel .
B.
Each Manual shall be compiled as follows:
1. Data shall be bound in smooth surface hard back commercial quality three-ring notebooks
with project identification shown on the front cover and binding back. Identification labels
shall be typed and adhered with waterproof glue.
2. Notebooks shall have 9-1/2-inch by 11-1/2-inch covers with back width to permit the
covers to lie parallel or to converge, and have not less than 1-1/2-inch back width.
3. Index divider sheets of heavy Manila paper shall be inserted between each section of the
Manual with a 2-inch x 1/3-inch ready-cut shield tab attached to each sheet for
identification of sections.
4. Data sheets and diagrams shall be 8-1/2-inch x 11-inch or be mounted on 8-1/2-inch x 11inch sheets of 16-pound paper if smaller, with reinforced 11-inch mechanically perforated
edges. Drawings and diagrams larger than 8-1/2-inch by 11-inch shall be folded up from
the bottom to form a height of 11-inches and folded to the left to form a width of 8-1/2inches.
5. Table of Contents(Index) sheets shall be provided in the order listed with identifications
typed in capital letters.
C.
Each Manual shall contain the following information, data and drawings:
1. Copies of submittals (with Engineer's review comments and stamp), equipment and
materials.
2. Manufacturer's installation, operating and maintenance instructions for each item of
equipment with moving parts including recommended frequency of inspections and
maintenance for one year's period of time.
3. Manufacturer's list of renewal parts for each item of equipment with recommended stock
items and quantities indicated.
4. Control diagrams, electrical interlock diagrams, and control valve lists.
5. Copies of as-built shop drawings showing layouts and construction details.
6. Copies of Test and Balance Reports including list of instruments and description of
methods employed.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
HVAC Installer Qualifications:
1. Wherever the word "company" or "firm" is used in these subparagraphs, it shall mean the
contractor/subcontractor of record for the installations used for proficiency qualification.
2. Refer to the individual sections within this division for additional installer qualification
requirements.
3. The Contractor expressly warrants that the company performing the installation of the air
conditioning systems has demonstrated proficiency in the installation, start-up and
adjustment of such systems by the successful performance of work of the nature specified
herein on at least three commercial or institutional buildings, each containing minimum of
20 tons capacity or greater with ducted air distribution refrigerant piping, PTAC or wall
hung units excluded.
4. The Contractor further warrants that the aforesaid subcontractor, if any, has trained
personnel, instruments, tools, and equipment to perform the installation, start-up,
instruction and maintenance service specified.
5. The Contractor also warrants that the aforesaid installer, if any, has been in business
performing services of the nature specified herein for at least five years.
B.
Testing and Balancing: Refer to Section 23 0593.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
23 0510- 5
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
1.08 WARRANTY
A.
Refer to Section 01 7000 - Contract Closeout, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Submit manufacturers' warranties prior to final inspection. Refer to the General Conditions.
C.
Correct any defective Work within a one year period after Date of the Final Inspection. Provide
HVAC Installer's warranty letter.
D.
Where warranties beyond the Contractor's one (1) year warranty are specified, the additional
warranty time shall start on the same date as the Contractor's warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS-NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Refer to the specifications and Architectural and Structural drawings for additional requirements
pertaining to work under this discipline. Notify the Engineer for clarification in the event of
conflict.
B.
All materials of systems installation exposed in hollow spaces that are used as ducts or
plenums shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke development rating of 50
or less.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Drawings are diagrammatic and show the general proximity of the equipment, ducts, and pipes,
etc., are not to be scaled, and do not include all required changes in direction or offsets
necessary in coordinating the installation of various materials either between trades or within
the same trade. All dimensions shall be verified at the building site. Prefabrication and/or
installation of work from drawings shall be at the Contractor's risk. Refer to Architectural plans
for exact building dimensions and details.
B.
Space Conditions:
1. All apparatus shall fit into the available spaces in the building and must be introduced into
the building so as not to cause damage to the structure. Equipment larger than access to
equipment spaces shall be disassembled into sub-assemblies for installation.
2. Where deviations from the plans are required in order to conform to the space limitations,
such changes shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner and shall be subject to
approval.
3. All equipment requiring service shall be made accessible. Coordinate piping and ductwork
installation to avoid conflict with other trades.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Clearance above and in front of electrical switchgear, electrical power panels or control panels
shall be maintained by mechanical systems so that no mechanical ducts, pipes, vents or
equipment is routed above or across the space directly above this equipment in conformance
with the National Electrical Code.
B.
All equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers' published installation
instructions shipped with the equipment. In the event there is a discrepancy between these
specifications or Drawings and the manufacturers' instructions, no work shall be performed until
additional instructions are received.
C.
Install and connect all appliances, equipment, and appurtenances as specified, indicated or
required in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Furnish and
install complete auxiliary piping, water seals, valves, electric connections, and similar items,
recommended by the manufacturer or as required for proper operation.
D.
Equipment, valves and other items installed under this division requiring service shall be
installed to be readily accessible. Refer to definitions in this section.
E.
Coordinate with the Contractor and monitor the progress of the work so that other trades do not
obstruct items requiring access for service.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
23 0510- 6
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
F.
After final balancing, equipment with belt drives shall have their belts operating in the mid-80%
position of the adjustable sheave.
G.
Provide equipment belt and coupling guards shielding the perimeter and face of all new belt
drives, shafts and couplings. Provide openings opposite drive and driven shafts to permit use of
revolution counter. Guards for fans shall be supported from the fan and mounting base,
independent of the floor or housekeeping pad.
H.
Route piping and ductwork to avoid skylights, translucent, and transparent ceilings.
I.
Equipment and pipe support upper attachments shall be 3" x 3" x 1/4" steel angles, minimum,
spanning structural members unless noted otherwise. Provide inserts and bolts for supporting
pipes and equipment from structural members.
J.
Saw cut or core drill openings in existing work for the installation of the mechanical system.
Patching shall be performed by the trade whose work is cut. Contractor shall lay out and install
his work ahead of the work of other trades wherever possible.
3.04 STARTING EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A.
Adjust equipment for proper operation within manufacturers' published tolerances.
B.
Demonstrate proper operation of systems and equipment to the Owner 's designated
representative.
3.05 CLEANING and PROTECTION
A.
All materials, equipment and mechanical rooms shall be cleaned prior to Final Observation.
B.
Wash down and scrub clean all mechanical room floors, walls, equipment bases and
equipment.
C.
Paint equipment where finish has been damaged requiring retouching of finish to match factory
finish.
D.
All air handling equipment shall be cleaned internally prior to Final Observation. Clean unit
casing externally and internally. Seal/replace all damaged duct liner.
E.
Chipped or scraped paint shall be retouched to match original finish.
F.
Clean and polish all equipment nameplates. All nameplate information shall be legible.
G.
All dents and sags in ductwork and equipment casings shall be straightened.
H.
All ductwork, insulation, equipment, pipe, pipe fittings and appurtenances shall be free of dust,
rust and stains prior to Final Observation.
3.06 FINISHING EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL
A.
Use paint systems specified in Division 9 for the substrates to be finished.
B.
Paint shop-primed equipment.
C.
Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical
components and paint separately.
D.
Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed
prior to finishing.
E.
All ferrous fasteners and hanger supports not having a corrosion resistant plated finish shall be
painted to prevent rust.
F.
Paint all exposed un-insulated ferrous metals, flat black.
G.
Paint interior surfaces of air ducts that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of
flat black paint to visible surfaces.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
23 0513- 1
MOTORS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 0513 - MOTORS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Single phase electric motors.
B.
Three phase electric motors.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ABMA STD 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings; American Bearing
Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 1990 (Reapproved 2008).
B.
IEEE 112 - IEEE Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators;
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers; 2004.
C.
NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2009,
Revision 1 - 2010.
D.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition
Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and
Supplements.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to NFPA 70.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory covers and
suitable weather-proof covering. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from
equipment and store separately.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Baldor, Century, Lincoln, Marathon, Magnetec, Toshiba
2.02 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS
A.
Electrical Service:
1. Motors 1/2 HP and Smaller: 115 volts, single phase, 60 Hz.
2. Motors 1/2/ HP and larger: three phase 60 Hz.
a. 460 volt motors on 480 volt systems.
3. Refer to Electrical drawings for voltage and phase required.
B.
Overload Protection: Single phase motors shall be furnished with built-in automatic reset
overload protection.
C.
Efficiency: Motors 1 HP and larger shall be premium efficiency motors and have minimum full
load efficiencies not less than listed in the Energy Code.
D.
Brake Horsepower: All motors shall have rated horsepower at least 10 percent above the
indicated brake horsepower of equipment including belt losses and inlet vane losses.
E.
Construction:
1. Open drip-proof type except where specifically noted otherwise.
2. Design for continuous operation in 40 degrees C environment.
3. Design for temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class,
service factor, and motor enclosure type.
4. All copper windings and leads.
5. Motors for belt driven equipment and base mounted pumps shall have cast iron yoke and
bearing housings.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
23 0513- 2
MOTORS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
F.
Visible Nameplate: Indicating motor horsepower, voltage, phase, cycles, RPM, full load amps,
locked rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer's name and model number, service factor, power
factor, efficiency.
G.
Motors serviced by Variable Frequency Controllers: Motors shall be definite Purpose Inverter
Duty Motors complying with NEMA MG-1, Part 31. Stator laminations shall be vacuum-pressure
impregnated with varnish for reduction of audible motor noise. Bearings shall be electrically
insulated.
H.
Wiring Terminations:
1. Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials
indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70, threaded for conduit.
2. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide threaded
conduit connection in end frame.
2.03 APPLICATIONS
A.
Exception: Motors less than 250 watts, for intermittent service may be the equipment
manufacturer's standard and need not conform to these specifications.
B.
Single phase motors for shaft mounted fans or blowers: Permanent split capacitor type.
C.
Single phase motors for fans and pumps: Capacitor start, capacitor run type.
2.04 SINGLE PHASE POWER - PERMANENT-SPLIT CAPACITOR MOTORS
A.
Starting Torque: Exceeding one fourth of full load torque.
B.
Starting Current: Up to six times full load current.
C.
Multiple Speed: Through tapped windings.
D.
Open Drip-proof or Enclosed Air Over Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise)
insulation, minimum 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings, automatic reset
overload protector.
2.05 SINGLE PHASE POWER - CAPACITOR START MOTORS
A.
Starting Torque: Three times full load torque.
B.
Starting Current: Less than five times full load current.
C.
Pull-up Torque: Up to 350 percent of full load torque.
D.
Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250 percent of full load torque.
E.
Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; provide capacitor-start/capacitor-run motors
with two capacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit at operating speeds.
F.
Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service
Factor, prelubricated sleeve bearings.
G.
Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor,
prelubricated ball bearings.
2.06 THREE PHASE POWER - SQUIRREL CAGE MOTORS
A.
Starting Torque: Between 1 and 1-1/2 times full load torque.
B.
Starting Current: Six times full load current.
C.
Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pull Out Torque: NEMA Design B
characteristics.
D.
Design, Construction, Testing, and Performance: Conform to NEMA MG 1 for Design B motors.
E.
Insulation System: NEMA Class B or better.
F.
Testing Procedure: In accordance with IEEE 112. Load test motors to determine free from
electrical or mechanical defects in compliance with performance data.
G.
Motor Frames: NEMA Standard T-Frames of steel, aluminum, or cast iron with end brackets of
cast iron or aluminum with steel inserts.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
23 0513- 3
MOTORS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
H.
Bearings: Grease lubricated anti-friction ball bearings with housings equipped with plugged
provision for relubrication, rated for minimum ABMA STD 9, L-10 life of 20,000 hours.
Calculate bearing load with NEMA minimum V-belt pulley with belt center line at end of NEMA
standard shaft extension. Stamp bearing sizes on nameplate.
I.
Sound Power Levels: To NEMA MG 1.
J.
Nominal Efficiency: As scheduled at full load and rated voltage when tested in accordance with
IEEE 112.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install securely on firm foundation. Mount ball bearing motors with shaft in any position.
C.
Check line voltage and phase and ensure agreement with nameplate.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
23 0515- 1
ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS
SECTION 23 0515 - ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Magnetic motor controllers
B.
Combination magnetic motor controllers and disconnects
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 23 0553 - Mechanical Identification: Engraved nameplates
B.
Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
NECA (INST) - Standard of Installation; National Electrical Contractors Association; 1993.
B.
NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches; 1993.
C.
NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays
Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC; National Electrical Manufacturers
Association; 1993.
D.
NEMA ICS 6 - Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures; National Electrical Manufacturers
Association; 1993.
E.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code 2011.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 23 0510- General HVAC Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, controller size, ratings and size of
switching and overcurrent protective devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and enclosure
details.
C.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by
testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation,
and installation of product.
D.
Maintenance Data: Replacement parts list for controllers.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70, 2002 Edition.
B.
Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose
specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Allen Bradley, Eaton, Furnas, General Electric, Joslyn Clark, Siemens, Square-D, ABB.
2.02 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLERS
A.
Magnetic Motor Controllers: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A magnetic controller for
induction motors rated in horsepower.
B.
Starters shall be NEMA type starters. IEC type starters are not allowed.
C.
Coil Operating Voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz.
D.
Overload Relays: NEMA ICS 2; bimetal.
E.
Enclosures:
1. Enclosures: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 indoors.
2. Enclosures: NEMA ICS 6, Type 3R outdoors.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
23 0515- 2
ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A.
Refer to HVAC Sequence of Operation for auxiliary contacts and where pushbuttons and
remote pushbutton stations are required.
B.
Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, 2 field convertible contacts in addition to seal-in contact.
C.
Pushbuttons: Recessed type.
D.
Indicating Lights: Transformer, incandescent type.
E.
Selector Switches: Rotary type Hand-Off-Automatic. Provide unless noted otherwise.
F.
Control Power Transformers: 120 volt secondary, 145 VA minimum, in each motor starter.
Provide fused primary, secondary, and bond unfused leg of secondary to enclosure.
2.04 DISCONNECTS
A.
Combination Controllers: Combine motor controllers with disconnects in common enclosure.
Obtain IEC Class 2 coordinated component protection.
B.
Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, with integral thermal and instantaneous
magnetic trip in each pole.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
All three phase motors furnished under this Division not fed from a starter in a motor control
center or Variable Frequency Controller shall be provided with combination starter and circuit
breaker unless otherwise noted.
B.
Install enclosed controllers where indicated, in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation.
C.
Install enclosed controllers plumb.
D.
Height: 5 ft to operating handle.
E.
Install with minimum of four anchors.
F.
In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1
inch off wall.
G.
Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed
in hollow partitions.
H.
Select and install overload heater elements in motor controllers to match installed motor
characteristics.
I.
Provide engraved plastic nameplates; refer to Section 23 0553 for product requirements and
location.
J.
Neatly type label inside each motor controller door identifying motor served, nameplate
horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, voltage/phase rating, panel and
circuit number. Place label in clear plastic holder.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
23 0548- 1
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQ
SECTION 23 0548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Equipment support bases.
B.
Vibration isolators.
C.
Vibration isolators.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 23 0510 - General HVAC Requirements for submittal procedures.
B.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions with special procedures and
setting dimensions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Amber Booth: www.amberbooth.com.
B.
Kinetics Noise Control, Inc: www.kineticsnoise.com.
C.
Korfund Dynamics: www.thevmcgroup.com.
D.
Mason Industries: www.mason-ind.com.
E.
Kinetics Noise Control: www.mason-ind.com.
F.
Vibration Eliminator Co.: www.veco-ny.com.
G.
Vibration Mounting and Control: www.vmc-kdc.com.
2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General:
1. All vibration isolators, base frames and inertia bases to conform to all uniform deflection
and stability requirements under all operating loads.
2. Steel springs to function without undue stress or overloading.
2.03 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT BASES
2.04 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
2.05 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A.
Neoprene Pad Isolators:
1. Rubber or neoprene waffle pads.
B.
Rubber Mount or Hanger: Molded rubber designed for 0.4 inch deflection with threaded insert.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.02 SCHEDULE
A.
Equipment Isolation Schedule.
1. Suspended fans:
a. Isolator Type: Rubber Mount or Hanger.
b. Isolator Deflection: .75 inches.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
23 0553- 1
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Nameplates.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 23 0510- General HVAC Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS
A.
Heat Transfer Equipment: Nameplates.
B.
Thermostats: Nameplates.
2.02 NAMEPLATES
A.
Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting
background color.
B.
Size:1/2 inch high letters unless otherwise noted.
C.
Size when located on ceiling grid: 3/8 inch high letters unless otherwise noted.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Identify air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment devices
with plastic nameplates.
B.
Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
23 0593- 1
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 0593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Initial testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.
B.
Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.
C.
Testing of control sensors, controllers and safeties.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AABC MN-1 - AABC National Standards for Total System Balance; Associated Air Balance
Council; 2002.
B.
NEBB (TAB) - Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental
Systems; National Environmental Balancing Bureau; 2005, Seventh Edition.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 23 0510 - General HVAC Requirements for submittal procedures.
B.
Initial Report: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and
balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.
1. Submit prior to the Contractor's Request for Final Observation.
2. Submit prior to the Contractor's Request for Substantial Completion.
3. Submit copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies
for the Engineer and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.
4. Include actual instrument list, with manufacturer name, serial number, and date of
calibration.
5. Form of Test Reports: Where the TAB standard being followed recommends a report
format use that; otherwise, follow ASHRAE Std 111.
6. Units of Measure: Report data in both I-P (inch-pound) and SI (metric) units.
7. Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC MN-1 forms, forms prepared following ASHRAE Std
111, or NEBB forms.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Perform total system balance in accordance with one of the following:
1. AABC MN-1, AABC National Standards for Total System Balance.
2. NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems.
B.
Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced and complete work
and submit Report prior to the Final Observation of the project.
C.
TAB Agency Qualifications:
1. Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this
section.
D.
Pre-Qualified TAB Agencies: Testing and Balancing shall be performed by one of the following
firms:
1. Air Analysis of Atlanta.
2. Air Data - Macon, Inc.
3. Alpha Air Balance.
4. Atlanta Air Balance.
5. HVAC Testing Services, Inc.
6. TAB Services.
7. Thomas Balancing.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
23 0593- 2
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
3.02 EXAMINATION
A.
Review the contract documents and existing conditions for appurtenances and arrangement for
balancing prior to the installation of any equipment or material. the Contractor shall notify the
Engineer of any omissions noted within 30 days of the Contractor's notice to proceed.
B.
Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following
conditions:
1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition.
2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.
3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.
4. All filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to filters.
5. Duct systems are clean of debris.
6. Fans are rotating correctly.
7. Fire and volume dampers are in place, accessible, operable and open. Report observation
on test report.
8. All dampers and operators function smoothly from shut-off to full open.
9. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed.
10. Access doors are installed at specified components are accessible, are closed and duct
end caps are in place.
11. Air outlets are installed and connected.
12. Duct system leakage is minimized.
3.03 PREPARATION
A.
Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments
available to the Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing.
B.
Testing of equipment shall be simultaneous where components of a systems are connected;
e.g. DX coil and condensing unit.
3.04 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A.
Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and
exhaust air quantities at site altitude.
B.
Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of
duct. Close openings after measurement with permanent manufactured plugs.
C.
Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
D.
Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts
and noise.
E.
Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to the extent that adjustments do not
create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices
such as dampers and splitters.
F.
Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds by drive sheave adjustment.
Provide drive changes required to place belt in mid-position at final RPM. Vary branch air
quantities by damper regulation.
G.
Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or
inlet.
H.
Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including pressure drops at all
components including filters and fans, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for
50 percent loading of filters.
I.
Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design
conditions. Adjust operators on outside air dampers to ensure tight seal when shut.
J.
Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check
leakage.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
K.
23 0593- 3
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
The differential at the time of balance between the outside and return air streams shall be 15
degrees F, minimum, when the outside air quantities are established by temperature
differential.
3.05 CONTROL SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A.
Thermostats, Input/Output sensors and Controls: Measure temperature or flow at device and
record measurement and setting of controller.
3.06 MINIMUM DATA TO BE REPORTED
A.
Duct Traverses:
1. System zone/branch
2. Duct size
3. Area
4. Design velocity
5. Design air flow
6. Test velocity
7. Test air flow
8. Duct static pressure
9. Air temperature
10. Air correction factor
B.
Space Temperature and Humidity:
1. Temperature and humidity (whether controlled or not) of each conditioned space
2. Setpoint of each controlling thermostat or humidity sensing device.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
23 0913- 1
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 0913 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Thermostats.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
NEMA DC 3 - Residential Controls - Electrical Wall-Mounted Room Thermostats; National
Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2011.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 23 0510- General HVAC Requirements for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide description and engineering data for each control system component.
Include sizing as requested. Provide data for each system component and software module.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate complete operating data, system drawings, wiring diagrams, and
written detailed operational description of sequences. Submit schedule of valves indicating
size, flow, and pressure drop for each valve. For automatic dampers indicate arrangement,
velocities, and static pressure drops for each system.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Include inspection period, cleaning methods, recommended
cleaning materials, and calibration tolerances.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum 5 years experience employed directly by the digital equipment manufacturer.
B.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories
Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT - GENERAL
A.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories
Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
2.02 THERMOSTATS
A.
Electric Room Thermostats:
1. Type: NEMA DC 3, 24 volts, with setback/setup temperature control.
2. Service: one step cooling and one step heating.
3. Covers: Locking with set point adjustment, with thermometer.
B.
Room Thermostat Accessories:
1. Thermostat Guards: Lockable Metal mounted on separate base.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify that systems are ready to receive work.
C.
Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
D.
Sequence work to ensure installation of components is complementary to installation of similar
components in other systems.
E.
Coordinate installation of system components with installation of mechanical systems
equipment such as air handling units and air terminal units.
F.
Ensure installation of components is complementary to installation of similar components.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
23 0913- 2
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
B.
Locate all control devices except for sensors and devices integral to equipment within control
panels, unless otherwise noted.
C.
Install control devices in a readily accessible location. Refer to definitions in Section 23 0510.
D.
Coordinate with the Contractor and monitor the work so that other trades do not obstruct control
devices or other items requiring access for service.
E.
Device mounting:
1. All devices shall be permanently mounted and secured in place.
2. Gypsum Board and Plaster walls: Moly-bolt type anchor. No adhesive or plastic insert
anchors.
3. Concrete Walls: Non-ferrous screws and expansion shields.
4. Concrete masonry units: Mount to recessed box or secure with moly-bolt type anchor.
5. Provide accessory wall adapter plates where required to cover block or wall opening
edges.
F.
Identification:
1. Nameplates: Identify all sensors mounted in mechanical rooms using device ID and
number from control drawings with permanent label mounted adjacent to device.
Nameplates shall be engraved plastic laminate with uppercase black letters on a white
field, 1/4 inch minimum height.
a. Include sensor type, normal setpoints information on nameplate.
b. Mounting: Attach nameplates with epoxy cement or non-ferrous screws after final
painting.
2. Color code conductors with both ends identified with manufactured alpha-numeric selfadhesive vinyl tags, 3 mils thick, minimum, keyed to termination points.
G.
Electrical wiring:
1. All control and interlock wiring shall be provided under this section.
2. No splices between field devices and control panels are permitted.
3. All Wiring materials and methods shall comply with Division 26 except:
a. Minimum wire size shall be 14 AWG(copper) for line voltages.
b. Minimum wire size shall be 18 AWG(copper) for signal.
H.
Check and verify location of thermostats and exposed control sensors with plans and room
details before construction of wall assemblies. Locate between 42 to 48 inches above finished
floor. Mount at common elevation within same space. Align with lighting switches . Refer to
Section 26 0537.
I.
Mount in center of 8x8 inch block face with recessed mounting box and accessory wall adapter
plate covering block opening where mounted in concrete masonry units.
J.
Provide separate minimum outside air damper section adjacent to return air dampers with
separate damper operator.
K.
Install damper operators in accessible locations.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
23 3100- 1
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
SECTION 23 3100 - HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Metal ductwork.
B.
Flexible Ducts.
C.
Ductwork Fabrication.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASHRAE (FUND) - ASHRAE Handbook - Fundamentals; 2009.
B.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or ZincIron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2010.
C.
SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and
Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A.
Low Pressure Duct: Duct having Pressure Class of 2-inches or less.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 23 0510 - General HVAC Requirements for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data for :
1. Flexible ducts.
2. Duct take-off fittings.
3. Manufactured metal ductwork and fittings.
4. Transverse Duct Connection System.
5. Manufactured apparatus casing.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this
section, with minimum five years of documented experience.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant
manufacturers.
B.
Maintain temperatures within acceptable range during and after installation of duct sealants.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A.
Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic.
B.
Exercise care during construction to prevent the accumulation of dust, dirt, and refuse in the
supply and return ductwork.
C.
All openings shall be tightly closed with 8-mil polyethylene when work creating dust and debris
is in progress.
D.
Exposed Spiral Duct in finished spaces:
1. Accept products on site in protective wrapping. Inspect for damage.
2. Protect surface and finish from damaged(dings), grease or other contaminants affecting
duct finish.
3. "Nested" shipment for exposed duct shall not be acceptable.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DUCT ASSEMBLIES
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Galvanized Steel for Ducts: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M FS Type
B, with G90/Z275 coating.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
23 3100- 2
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
B.
Insulated Flexible Ducts:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Atco Rubber Products, Inc. Model UPC-037; www.atcoflex.com.
b. Thermaflex Model M-KE.
2. UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film mechanically bonded without
adhesive supported by helically wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation;
polyethylene vapor barrier film.
a. Insulation shall be 1 inch thick, minimum; 3/4 lbs/cu ft,minimum
b. Pressure Rating: 10 inches WG positive and 1.0 inches WG negative.
c. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm.
d. Temperature Range: -20 degrees F to 210 degrees F.
C.
Joint Sealers and Sealants: Non-hardening, water resistant, mildew and mold resistant.
1. Type: Heavy mastic or liquid used alone or with tape, suitable for joint configuration and
compatible with substrates, and recommended by manufacturer for pressure class of
ducts.
2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread of zero, smoke developed of zero, when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
3. Manufacturers(solvent based): Hardcast Sure Grip 404, Marathon , Miracle D-618, MMM800, Tuff-Bond No.29, United McGill United.
4. Non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials; liquid used
alone or with tape, or heavy mastic.
2.03 DUCTWORK FABRICATION
A.
General:
1. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and
sealing for operating pressures indicated.
B.
No variation of duct configuration or size permitted except by written permission. Size round
duct installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE Handbook Fundamentals.
C.
Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.
D.
Provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation when acoustical lining is
indicated.
E.
All dimensions are net inside metal measurements in inches unless otherwise shown.
F.
Duct sizes shown include allowance for liner thickness unless otherwise noted, except sizes
shown for lined round spiral and flat oval duct are sizes of perforated inner liner
G.
Exposed Duct:
1. Exposed duct in finished spaces shall be medium pressure Spiral duct and fittings.
2. Exposed duct finish shall be mill phosphatized for field painting.
3. Provide segmented standing seam on exposed duct in finished spaces.
4. Provide welded joints and seams where indicated in the Schedule. Grind and polish all
welded seams. Weld stainless steel with S.S. rod and brush with stainless wire brushes.
5. Fabricate continuously welded round and flat oval duct fittings two gages heavier than
duct gages indicated in SMACNA Standard. Joints shall be minimum 4 inch cemented
slip joint, brazed or electric welded. Prime coat welded joints.
H.
Transverse Duct Connection System: SMACNA "E" rated rigidly class connection, interlocking
angle and duct edge connection system with sealant, gasket, cleats, and corner clips.
I.
Low Pressure Duct- Supply, Return, and Exhaust ( 2" Class or less):
1. Longitudinal Seams:
a. Corner Seams: Fig. 2-2, Type L1 (Pittsburgh Lock).
1) Corner seams for ducts less than 18 inch, L-2 (Button Punch Snap Lock) is
acceptable.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
23 3100- 3
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
b. Fig. 2-2, Type L-3 for seams other than corner.
Transitions:
a. Changes in duct sizes shall be made by transitions.
b. Refer to Fig. 4-7, CONCENTRIC TRANSITION, unless otherwise noted.
c. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever
possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees
convergence downstream.
d. Transitions shall be provided between equipment and duct where sizes are not the
same.
Rectangular Duct:
a. Elbows:
1) Mitered with turning vanes. Type RE 2, Figure 4-2, unless otherwise noted.
b. Turning Vanes:
1) Turning vanes shall be in accordance with Figs 4-3 and 4-4, unless otherwise
noted.
2) Provide single wall vanes for ducts 18" width or less.
3) Provide double wall vanes for ducts over 18" width.
c. Splits and Tees:
1) Fig. 4-5, Type 1, Type 2 (with stationary splitter), 4A, or 4B only.
2) Use of Square Throat Elbow with Turning Vanes is acceptable, unless otherwise
noted.
(a) Provide volume control damper in each branch.
3) Omit volume control damper in Return and Exhaust duct unless otherwise
noted.
4) Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide acoustical turning vanes of
perforated metal with glass fiber insulation.
Round Duct:
a. Elbows: Radius elbow with radius not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on
centerline.
Branch and Runout Connections:
a. Entry fittings for Return and Exhaust: Construct for a 45 degree entry angle to ease
the turbulence created by converging airstreams. Increase the minimum length
shown in Fig. 4-6, 45 DEGREE ENTRY, from 4 inch to 6 inch.
b. Rectangular Branch or Runout from Rectangular Duct:
1) Fig. 4-6, 45 DEGREE ENTRY, with flange and gasket for connection to trunk
with a minimum of six screws.
c. Round Branch or Runout from Rectangular Duct:
1) Fig. 4-6, 45 DEGREE LEAD IN, with flange and gasket for connection to trunk
with a minimum of six screws.
2) Provide volume control damper with locking quadrant at branch or runout
connection unless over inaccessible ceiling (Refer to Grille Schedule on
Drawings for neck mounted volume dampers).
d. Round Branch or Runout from Round Duct:
1) Fig. 3-5, (all fittings acceptable), unless otherwise noted.
e. Rectangular Runout to Sidewall Grille/Register:
1) Fig. 4-6, 45 DEGREE ENTRY, with flange and gasket for connection to trunk
with a minimum of six screws.
Offsets: Fig. 4-7, Type 1 and Type 3 only, unless otherwise indicated.
Dampers: Fig. 7-4, SINGLE BLADE TYPE, or 7-5, MULTIBLADE TYPE.
Reinforcement:
a. Fabricate ducts in clearance critical areas such as chases and above ceilings to
unreinforced standards, Fig. 2-8.
1) Tie Rod Reinforcement is acceptable in Supply, Return, and Exhaust duct only.
2) No screw or rivets are allowed to penetrate ducts.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
23 3100- 4
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
J.
Field Fabricated Mixing Plenums:
1. Outer wall to provide pressure class rating scheduled.
2. Provide 2 inch acoustical lining.
3. Inner wall to be 20 gauge perforated sheet metal.
4. For air handling unit mixed air plenums, provide LOCK Type 2, Fig. 7-2M.
K.
Ducts Connecting to Wall Louvers:
1. Provide sheet metal plenum sealing louver area and connecting duct.
2. Fabricate in accordance with Fig. 6-1.
3. Fabricate plenum using same material and pressure class as connecting duct.
4. Paint exterior side of plenum flat black.
2.04 MANUFACTURED DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS
A.
Round and Flat Oval Ducts:
1. Manufacture in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible.
2. Fittings: Manufacture at least two gages heavier metal than duct.
3. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.
4. Manufacturer-Layout Basis:
a. United Sheet Metal Company(McGill Airflow).
b. Other Acceptable manufacturers:
1) Air Distribution Systems.
2) BH&W Sheetmetal (Atlanta)
3) Dixie Sheet metal Products.
4) Don Park, Inc.
5) Eastern Sheet metal.
6) McKenney's, Inc. (Atlanta)
7) Monroe Metals.
8) Norlock.
9) Patton Industries
10) Semco.
11) U.S. Air Duct.
12) West-Spiro Co.
B.
Transverse Duct Connection System: SMACNA "E" rated rigidly class connection, interlocking
angle and duct edge connection system with sealant, gasket, cleats, and corner clips.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining.
B.
Duct sizes for runouts to Air Terminals and grilles, registers and diffusers shall match the size
of the device unless otherwise noted.
C.
Install and seal metal and flexible ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible.
D.
Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and
maintenance activities.
E.
Provide minimum 24 inch wide by 48 inch high access door in field fabricated mixing plenums
of same construction as the mixing plenums.
F.
Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.
G.
Seal all transverse joints in metal supply, exhaust and return ducts.
H.
Exposed Round & flat oval duct in finished spaces: Size duct lengths to minimize joints. Align
spiral seams at joints. Install longitudinal and transverse joints in least visible locations. Apply
sealer to female fitting and assemble where sealer is not visible.
I.
Dryer Vent Ductwork:
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
1.
2.
J.
23 3100- 5
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
Construct of spiral pipe with fabricated fittings with the interior free of sheet metal screws
and obstructions. Secure with rivets. Seal duct joints with duct sealer.
Route from dryer thru lint trap to wall cap
During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open
ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.
3.02 SCHEDULES
A.
Ductwork Material:
1. General Exhaust: Galvanized Steel.
2. Dryer Vent Exhaust: Galvanized Steel., Stainless Steel.
B.
Ductwork Pressure Class:
1. General Exhaust: 2 inch negative.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
23 3300- 1
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
SECTION 23 3300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Duct access doors.
B.
Volume control dampers.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 23 3100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National
Fire Protection Association; 2009.
B.
SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and
Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 23 0510 - General HVAC Requirements for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers.
Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DUCT ACCESS DOORS(AP)
A.
Manufacturer: Cesco Model *AD.
B.
Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products: Airstream, Flexmaster Inspector
Series, Nailor Hart Model 0800, National Controlled Air ADR, Prefco, Ruskin, Ventlok,Pottorff.
C.
Fabrication:
1. Factory fabricated in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible, Figures 7-2, 7-3 and as indicated.
2. Rigid and close-fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking
devices.
3. Install minimum 1 inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover for insulated ducts.
4. Access doors up to 2 inch pressure class:
a. Larger Sizes: Provide an additional hinge.
5. Fabricate access doors over 2 inch pressure class in accordance with Figure 7-2.
D.
Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.
2.02 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS (MVD).
A.
Splitter Dampers:
1. Material: Same gage as duct to 24 inches size in either direction, and two gages heavier
for sizes over 24 inches.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 23 3100
for duct construction and pressure class.
B.
Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and as
indicated. Provide 4 x 4 inch for balancing dampers only. Review locations prior to fabrication.
C.
Label access doors as required by NFPA 90A.
D.
Use splitter dampers only where indicated.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
23 3423- 1
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
SECTION 23 3423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Inline centrifugal fans.
B.
Cabinet exhaust fans.
C.
Ceiling exhaust fans.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 23 0513 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment.
B.
Section 23 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
C.
Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 23 0510 - General HVAC Requirements for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on fans and accessories including fan curves with specified
operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels at rated capacity, and
electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
C.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions.
D.
Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare
parts list, and wiring diagrams.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories
Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A.
Refer to Section 23 0510 - General HVAC Requirements for delivery, storage and protection
requirements.
B.
Do not operate units until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has
been test run under observation.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
B.
Provide a second adjustable sheave for each belt driven fan to place belt at mid-position of
sheave at RPM required for final air balance.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 INLINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS(ILC)
A.
Manufacturers: Acme XB, Breidert BIC, Cook SQI, Greenheck BSQ, Peerless Centrifan,
Powerline BCSL, Twin City ILB.
B.
Product Requirements:
1. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal
per AMCA 261.
2. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bearing AMCA Certified Sound
Rating Seal per AMCA 261.
3. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99.
4. UL Compliance: UL listed and labeled, designed, manufactured, and tested in
accordance with UL 705.
C.
Motor: Refer to Section 23 0513.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
23 3423- 2
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
D.
Fan Unit: Air foil centrifugal fan with V-belt or direct driven as indicated, belt guard, companion
flanges, inlet cone, flow vanes, grease lubricated with external fittings, and access door.
E.
Disconnect Switch: Factory wired, non-fusible, in housing for thermal overload protected motor
. Provide NEMA 1 housing for interior locations and NEMA 3R for exterior locations.
F.
Backdraft Damper: Gravity actuated, aluminum multiple blade construction, felt edged with
offset hinge pin, nylon bearings, blades linked.
G.
Drive and Sheaves: Drives rated at 1.5 time motor HP, minimum. Cast iron or steel sheaves,
dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed; variable and adjustable pitch motor sheave
selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid-position; fan shaft with selfaligning pre-lubricated ball bearings.
2.02 CABINET(CAB) AND CEILING(CLG) EXHAUST FANS
A.
Manufacturers: Acme V, Carnes VCDB, Cook Gemini, Greenheck SP, Jenn J, Penn Z,
Powerline CF, Twin City TCTB.
B.
Motor: Refer to Section 23 0513.
C.
Centrifugal Fan Unit: Direct driven unless noted otherwise with galvanized steel housing lined
with acoustic insulation, resilient mounted motor, gravity backdraft damper in discharge.
D.
Disconnect Switch: Cord and plug in housing for thermal overload protected motor .
E.
Capacity Control: Solid State speed controller mounted on/in fan housing.
F.
Grille for ceiling mounted fan(s): Molded white plastic.
G.
Service Access: Removable grille for ceiling mounted fan(s) or access panel for inline cabinet
fan(s).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Suspended Fans:
1. Install fans with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads. Refer to Section 23 0548.
2. Install flexible connections specified in Section 23 3300 between fan and ductwork.
Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex between
ductwork and fan while running.
C.
Provide a second adjustable sheave to place belt at mid-position of sheave at RPM required for
final air balance.
D.
Provide backdraft dampers on outlet from cabinet and ceiling exhauster fans and as indicated.
3.02 STARTING EQUIPMENT
A.
Adjust for proper operation within manufacturer's published tolerances.
B.
Demonstrate proper operation of equipment to the Owner 's designated representative.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
23 3700- 1
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
SECTION 23 3700 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Registers/grilles
B.
Door grilles
C.
Louvers
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CEILING GRID CORE EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES(CGC)
A.
Manufacturer: Titus Model 50F
B.
Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products:
1. Anemostat GC5
2. Carnes RAPAF
3. Price 80
4. Krueger RA
5. Nailor 51EC.
6. MetalAire CC5
7. Tuttle & Bailey CRE500
C.
Type: Fixed grilles of 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/2 inch louvers.
D.
Fabrication: Aluminum with factory clear lacquer finish.
E.
Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting.
F.
Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable
from face.
2.02 DOOR GRILLES(DG)
A.
Manufacturer: Titus Model T700.
B.
Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products:
1. Anemostat NS.
2. Carnes RGHAC.
3. Price STG.
4. Krueger 77C.
5. MetalAire DGDF.
6. Tuttle & Bailey GDV.
C.
Type: V-shaped sight-proof blades of 20 gage thick steel, 1 inch deep on 1/2 inch centers.
D.
Frame: 20 gage steel with auxiliary frame to give finished appearance on both sides of door,
with factory prime coat finish.
2.03 LOUVERS-ALUMINUM-DRAINABLE BLADE STYLE
A.
Manufacturer: Ruskin Model ELF-6375DX.
B.
Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products:
1. American Warming & Ventilating LE-33.
2. Air Balance .
3. Dowco DW-6.
4. Greenheck ESD-603.
5. Industrial Louvers 653.
6. Louvers & Dampers IEL-6.
7. Shipman LE-33.
8. Tuttle & Bailey DB-645.
C.
Type: 6 inch deep with blades on 45 degree slope, drainable blade with gutter, heavy channel
frame, 19 gauge birdscreen with 1/2 inch square mesh for exhaust and 3/4 inch for intake.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
23 3700- 2
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
D.
Fabrication: 12 gage thick extruded aluminum, welded assembly, with factory baked enamel
finish color to be selected.
E.
Mullions: Provide hidden or exposed mullions to support blades as shown on architectural
elevations.
F.
Mounting: Furnish with masonry strap anchors for installation.
G.
Insulated Blank-Off Panels:
1. Fabricate louver blank-off panels of materials and sizes indicated and to comply with the
following requirements:
a. Finish: Match finish applied to louver with respect to coating type, except for color,
which shall be flat black.
b. Attach blank-off panels to back of louver frames with stainless-steel sheet-metal
screws.
2. Blank-Off Panels: Laminated metal-faced panels consisting of insulating core surfaced on
back and front with metal sheets, complying with the following requirements:
a. Thickness: 2 inches (50 mm).
b. Metal Facing Sheets: Aluminum sheet, 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick.
c. Insulating Core: Unfaced, rigid, glass-fiberboard insulation complying with ASTM
C612, Class 1 and Class 2.
d. Edge Treatment: Trim perimeter edges of blank-off panels with louver manufacturer’s
standard extruded-aluminum-channel frames 0.081 inch (2.06 mm) thick, with
corners mitered and with same finish as panels.
e. Seal perimeter joints between panel faces and louver frames with 1/8 inch by 1 inch
(3.2 mm by 25 mm) polyvinyl chloride compression gaskets.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform
with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
C.
Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection.
D.
Door grilles: Furnish door grilles to General Contractor for installation by Door Installer.
3.02 AIR OUTLET AND INLET SCHEDULE
A.
Refer to Schedule on Drawings.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
23 8101- 1
TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS
SECTION 23 8101 - TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Electric heaters.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 23 0510 - General HVAC Requirements
B.
Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
Installation of room thermostats. Electrical supply to units.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 23 0510 - General HVAC Requirements for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide typical catalog of information including arrangements.
C.
Refer to Submittals in Section 23 0510 for requirements regarding Tabulation of Power Wiring
Requirements.
D.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions and recommendations.
E.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturers descriptive literature, operating
instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listings.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A.
Refer to Section 23 0510 - General HVAC Requirements for general delivery, storage and
protection requirements.
B.
Do not operate duct mounted equipment until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings
lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ELECTRIC CEILING HEATERS(ECH)
A.
Manufacturer: Qmark Model CDF.
B.
Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products: Berko FFCH, Markel 3480,
Raywall RCH.
C.
Assembly: UL listed and labeled with terminal box and cover, and controls.
D.
Heating Elements: Enclosed copper tube, aluminum finned element of coiled nickel-chrome
resistance wire centered in tubes and embedded in refractory material.
E.
Enclosure: Minimum 0.030 inch steel box for recessed mounting with removable contoured
steel louvered surface enclosure with baked enamel finish matching ceiling finish.
F.
Fan: Direct drive propeller type, statically and dynamically balanced.
G.
Motor: Permanently lubricated, sleeve bearings.
H.
Built-in Controls:
1. Power disconnect switch.
2. Automatic reset thermal overload protector.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install terminal units in a readily accessible location.
C.
Install equipment exposed to finished areas after walls and ceiling are finished and painted. Do
not damage equipment or finishes.
D.
Protection: Provide finished cabinet units with protective covers during balance of construction.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
E.
23 8101- 2
TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS
Install electric heating equipment including devices furnished by manufacturer but not factorymounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal.
3.02 CLEANING
A.
After construction is completed, including painting, clean exposed surfaces of units. Vacuum
clean coils and inside of cabinets.
3.03 SCHEDULES
A.
Refer to Schedules on the Drawings.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 0510- 1
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 26 0510 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Definitions
B.
Quality Assurance Requirements and Installer Qualifications.
C.
Submittal Procedures
D.
Execution Requirements common to Division 26 systems
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A.
Manufacturers Representatives: Wherever MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE is
referred to in this division, said representative shall be regularly employed by the manufacturer
to perform similar activities to those called for herein, which indicates his competence in that
field of work.
B.
Concealed: Where the word concealed is used in this Division, it shall mean items above
ceilings, in attics, in crawl spaces, in chases, in tunnels, in cabinet work, and under counters or
equipment so as to be not visible from an elevation of 5 feet at a horizontal distance of 10 feet.
C.
Finished Spaces or Areas: Where finished spaces or areas are referred to in this Division, it
shall mean all spaces except concealed spaces, mechanical rooms, or boiler rooms unless
otherwise noted.
D.
Provide: Where the word provide is used, it shall mean to furnish and install the item(s) in
accordance with plans, specifications or manufacturer's instructions.
E.
Control and Interlock Wiring: All wiring, both line voltage and low voltage, other than power
wiring from an electrical distribution panel, through the primary control device, to the equipment.
F.
Primary Control Device: That ONE device for any item of equipment which interrupts power
flow during normal operation. Where magnetic starters are provided, they are the primary
control. For items not switched by starters, the primary control device will be the ONE
thermostat, manual switch, aquastat, P.E. switch, or relay performing the primary switching.
G.
Diagrammatic: A drawing that shows arrangement and relations (as of parts).i.e: A
diagrammatic drawing uses symbols rather than pictorial representation of pipes, ducts, conduit
and other items shown and is not necessarily to scale. Arrangement, location, and sizes shown
are firm.
H.
Readily Accessible: Equipment, valves and other items requiring service shall be installed to be
readily accessible. These items shall be available for maintenance or use in a space, through
an access door from floor elevation, or above a lay-in ceiling by maintenance staff standing on
a ladder no taller than the ceiling.
I.
Noted, Indicated or Shown: Where the terms "Noted", "Indicated" or "Shown" are used in these
specifications, the words "in the specifications or on the plans" shall be inferred.
J.
Detail: Details referenced shall pertain to plans unless otherwise noted.
K.
Specifications: Where reference is made to these specifications, it shall be inferred in this
Division of specifications.
L.
Notification by the Contractor, and Instructions to the Contractor: Where reference is made in
these specifications to notification by or instructions given to the Contractor, it shall be inferred
that the Engineer shall be the notifier or the instructor as the case exists.
M. Submittal Data, Equipment Cuts, Shop Drawings: Wherever these terms are used in the plans
or specifications, the information is to be submitted for review as part of the packaged submittal
specified under "SUBMITTALS".
N.
Conduit of Duct Bank: Two or more, 2-inch or larger conduits with a common point of origin and
a common point of termination routed parallel, and as specifically designated on plans.
O.
See Article 100 of the 2011 National Electrical Code with Georgia State Amendments.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
P.
26 0510- 2
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
Division or Section Reference: Where reference is made to another Division or Section within
this Division, refer to specifications table of contents for Division, Section, or Page Number.
1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Where requirements of these specifications exceed specified codes and ordinances,
conform to these specifications.
B.
Materials and equipment included in Underwriters Label Service shall bear that label. Electrical
equipment shall be U.L. approved as installed.
C.
Jurisdiction: Where codes or guides refer jurisdiction to local governing code officials, such
official in this procedure shall be the State Fire Marshal.
D.
Permits: Permits and licenses of a temporary nature necessary for the prosecution of the work
shall be obtained and paid for by the Contractor. Neither the Contractor nor any sub-contractor
will be required to pay Municipal or County building permit fees. The Contractor and/or any
subcontractor will be required to pay any Municipal and/or County building license taxes or
fees, if any.
E.
Energy: Conform to the International Energy Conservation Code, 2009 Edition, 2011 & 2012
Georgia State Amendments.
F.
Fire Prevention: Conform to Georgia State Minimum Standard Fire Prevention Code
(International Fire Code), 2006 Edition, with 2007 & 2010 Georgia State Amendments.
G.
Building Code: Conform to the Georgia State Minimum Standard Building Code (International
Building Code), 2006 Edition with 2007, 2009 & 2010 Amendments.
H.
Electrical: Conform to the 2011 National Electrical Code (NEC) with Georgia State
Amendments, NFPA, and the National Electrical Safety Code.
I.
Life Safety: Conform to the 2000 Edition of NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code March 9, 2010, with
Georgia State Amendments.
J.
Fire Alarm: Conform to the 2002 Edition of NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code, with 2007
Georgia State Amendments.
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Requirements specified herein are minimum. All equipment, when installed, shall perform equal
to or exceed specified requirements.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
Supplementing Division 1 requirements; the Contractor shall:
1. Review the submittal data and check to ensure compliance with specifications prior to
submitting.
a. The Contractor agrees that submittals of equipment and material and shop drawings
of equipment and material layouts required under provisions of these specifications
and processed by the are not Change Orders.
b. The purpose of submittals is to demonstrate that the Contractor understands the
design concept of the project by indicating the equipment and materials he intends to
furnish and install, and by detailing the installation he intends to achieve. The review
by the Engineer shall NOT be construed to be for the purpose of "approving"
equipment or drawings. The plans and specifications alone are the contract
document. The contractor has agreed to follow the contract document, regardless of
the results of the submittal submission.
c. The Contractor shall conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents unless
a change order or a specific letter of clarification is issued. The Contractor shall
identify on each submittal and in letter form to the Engineer any and all deviations
from the Contract Documents.
d. Any submittal or shop drawing not conforming to the Contract Documents without this
identification and notification shall be assumed to be marked "Revise and Resubmit"
(the Contractor acknowledges this by the submission), and the Contractor shall
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
2.
3.
4.
5.
26 0510- 3
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
promptly resubmit said submittal so as to be in full compliance with the Contract
Documents.
e. Failure of the Contractor to provide this information during the shop drawing phase
shall make the Contractor responsible for all changes to achieve compliance with the
Contract Documents without additional compensation.
Assemble the submittal data in compete sets in hard back three-ring binders, separated
by trade, (Electrical), and bound with numbered index sheets and tabs. Submittal data
shall be submitted at one time unless unavailable data such as control submittal would
delay project progress. Submittal data shall include:
a. Panelboard information
b. RV pedestal information
c. Enclosed circuit breakers
d. Receptacles, light switches, boxes
e. Occupancy sensors
f.
Light fixtures
Identify all submittals by a cover sheet showing project name, specification sections,
drawing or detail number, room number, date, revision date, the Contractor and
subcontractor's organization and project manager with phone number, the model, style
and size of item being submitted with manufacturers' representative, salesman (or a
preparer who can answer questions), and preparer's phone number.
Prepare a master list of submittals proposed to be submitted on the project. This list shall
be updated for each submission and shall be the first sheet(s) of the submission in the
quantity that is submitted for review. The information and general format shall contain an
Tab number, Item Description, Item Status and any comment. Items that require quicker
submittal review because of material lead times should be indicated in this list.
Provide a Letter stating that all submittals have been checked for compliance with
specifications.
B.
Power Wiring Requirements: The Contractor shall submit a letter acknowledging receipt and
review of the Tabulated List of Power Wiring Requirements of all Mechanical Equipment
specified in Division 23 of the Specifications. Failure to submit this letter will require the
Contractor to assume responsibility for any required changes to the electrical design attributed
to mechanical equipment. Include a copy of the Tabulated List of Power Wiring Requirements
with the letter. The electrical requirements for the mechanical equipment is based on the best
information available at the time of design. The Contractor is responsible for coordinating with
the purchased equipment. Power Wiring letters are required for the following equipment:
1. Mechanical - fans, heaters, water heaters, etc.
C.
Service Voltage Verification: The Contractor shall provide a letter verifying that existing
voltages match voltages indicated on plans. The letter shall be included in the submittal data.
No electrical equipment shall be released for fabrication until such verification has been made.
1.06 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Each Manual shall be compiled as follows:
1. Data shall be bound in smooth surface hard back commercial quality three-ring notebooks
with project identification shown on the front cover and binding back. Identification labels
shall be typed and adhered with waterproof glue.
2. Notebooks shall have 9-1/2-inch by 11-1/2-inch covers with back width to permit the
covers to lie parallel or to converge, and have not less than 1-1/2-inch back width.
3. Index divider sheets of heavy Manila paper shall be inserted between each section of the
Manual with a 2-inch x 1/3-inch ready-cut shield tab attached to each sheet for
identification of sections.
4. Data sheets and diagrams shall be 8-1/2-inch x 11-inch or be mounted on 8-1/2-inch x 11inch sheets of 16-pound paper if smaller, with reinforced 11-inch mechanically perforated
edges. Drawings and diagrams larger than 8-1/2-inch by 11-inch shall be folded up from
the bottom to form a height of 11-inches and folded to the left to form a width of 8-1/2inches.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
5.
B.
26 0510- 4
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
Table of Contents(Index) sheets shall be provided in the order listed with identifications
typed in capital letters.
Each Manual shall contain the following information, data and drawings:
1. Copies of approved submittals (with Engineer's review comments and stamp), equipment
and materials.
2. Manufacturer's list of renewal parts for each item of equipment with recommended stock
items and quantities indicated.
3. Warranty Information.
4. A copy of the site plan indicating as-built routing of the feeders, as well as the location and
count of any underground conduit to be used in the future.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Installer's Qualifications:
1. General: Wherever the word "Sub-Contractor" or "Firm" is used in these subparagraphs, it
shall mean the Contractor/sub-contractor of record for the installations used for proficiency
qualification.
2. Warranty of Contractor: The Contractor shall warrant that the Firm(s) selected by him are
reputable, skilled, reliable, competent, qualified in the trade or field in which they are to
perform on the project, and thoroughly familiar with applicable codes and standards.
3. Location: The firm which performs the installation of the work under this section shall be
one who maintains an established, experienced organization with a permanent, manned
office. See General Conditions.
4. The firm shall have been in business performing services as specified herein for at least 3
years.
B.
Architectural And/Or Structural Requirements:
1. Refer to the specifications and Architectural and Structural drawings for additional
requirements pertaining to work under this discipline. Notify the Engineer if conflict for
clarification.
1.08 WARRANTY
A.
Refer to Section 01 7000 - Project Closeout, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Correct defective Work within a one year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
1.09 NOTIFICATION TO THE OWNER WHEN THE CONTRACTOR VISITS SITE AFTER FINAL
INSPECTION
A.
When the Contractor's representative visits the job after the final inspection to perform specific
work such as maintenance service, seasonal balance, or to correct a deficiency, the Contractor
shall notify the Owner not less than 48 hours prior to the date on which they will visit the site,
except under an emergency condition.
B.
The Contractor shall visit the designated office of the Owner to notify the Owner that the
Contractor is on the site prior to visiting the site, thereby enabling the Owner's representative to
accompany the Contractor, should they so desire while the Contractor is on the project site.
C.
A carbon copy of the notification shall be provided to the Engineer with the intent of the site
visit. After the Contractor has completed the site visit, the Contractor shall give a written report
of the action taken and any incomplete work yet to be performed to the Engineer, within five (5)
days.
1.10 ABBREVIATIONS - ELECTRICAL
AIC
AVAILABLE INTERRUPTING CAPACITY
A.F.F.
ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR
AL
ALUMINUM
ANT
ANTENNA
AWG
AMERICAN WIRE GAUGE
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
B.E.
BOTTOM ELEVATION
B.G.
BELOW FINISHED GRADE
BRKR
BREAKER
C
CONDUIT
CAT.
CATALOG
C.H.
CEILING HEIGHT
CLG
CEILING
C.O.
CONVENIENCE OUTLET
COND.
CONDUCTOR(S)
CR
CONTROL RELAY
26 0510- 5
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
CU
COPPER
D.
DIAMETER
EMER
EMERGENCY
EMT
ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING
F.O.
FIBER OPTIC
FAP
FIRE ALARM PANEL
FUT
FUTURE
GND
GROUND
H-O-A
HAND-OFF-AUTO
HPS
HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM
HTR
HEATER
I.A.W.
IN ACCORDANCE WITH
I.C.
INTERCOM MASTER STATION
IMC
INTERMEDIATE METALLIC CONDUIT
MB
MAIN BREAKER
M.C.
MASTER CLOCK
MFGR
MANUFACTURER
MLO
MAIN LUGS ONLY
MTD
MOUNTED
MTG
MOUNTING
MV
MERCURY VAPOR
N.E.C.
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (2002)
NFDS
NON FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH
N.I.C.
NOT IN CONTRACT
NMC
NON METALLIC CONDUIT
NO.
NUMBER
PB
PUSHBUTTON
PLCS
PLACES
PVC
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE
R.
RADIUS
R.G.S.
RIGID STEEL CONDUIT
SCHED.
SCHEDULE
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
SEC.
SECTION
SMR
SURFACE METAL RACEWAY
SURF.
SURFACE
SYM
SYMMETRICAL
TEL.
TELEPHONE
TR
TIME RELAY
TYP.
TYPICAL
W/
WITH
WP
WEATHERPROOF
XFMR
TRANSFORMER
20A/3P
20 AMP / 3 POLE TYPICAL
26 0510- 6
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TRADE NAMES
A.
When reference is made in the contract documents to trade names, brand names, or to the
names of manufacturers, such references are made solely to indicate that products of that
description may be furnished and are not intended to restrict competitive bidding. If it is desired
to use products of trade or brand names or of manufacturer's names which are different from
those mentioned in the contract documents, application for the approval of the use of such
products must reach the hands of the Architect at least ten days prior to the date set for the
opening of the bids. The latter provision is a restriction which applies only to the party making a
submittal. Therefore, the aforesaid restriction does not inhibit the Contractor from adding trade
names, brand names, or names of manufacturers by addendum.
B.
The burden of proving acceptability of a proposed product for use in place of a product or
products designated by trade names or names, brand name or names, or by the name or
names of manufacturers in the contract documents rests on the party submitting the request for
approval. The written application for approval of a proposed product must be accompanied by
technical data which the party requesting approval desires to submit in support of is application.
C.
The Architect will give consideration to reports from reputable independent testing laboratories'
verified experienced records showing the reputation of the proposed product with previous
users, evidence of reputation of the manufacturer for prompt delivery, evidence of reputation of
the manufacturer for efficiency in servicing its products, or any other written information that is
helpful in the circumstances. The application to the Engineer for approval of a proposed
product must be accompanied by a schedule setting forth in which respects the materials or
equipment submitted for consideration differ from the materials or equipment designated in the
contract documents. The degree of proof required for approval of a proposed product as
acceptable for use in place of a named product or named products is that amount of proof
neccessary to convince a reasonable person beyond all doubt.
D.
To be approved, a proposed product must also meet or exceed all express requirements of the
contract documents. If the submittal is approved by the Engineer, an addendum will be issued
to all prospective bidders. Issuance of an addendum is a representation to all bidders that the
Engineer in the exercise of his professional discretion established that the product submitted for
approval is acceptable and meets or exceeds all express requirements. In the event a submittal
shall have been rejected by the Engineer and there shall have been a request for a conference
as provided in the article pursuant to which conference the said submittal shall have been
found to comply with the requirements of this article, a separate addendum covering the said
submittal will be issued prior to the opening of the bids.
E.
In order for the Engineer to prepare an addendum intelligently, an application for approval of a
product must be accompanied by a copy of the published recommendations of the
manufacturer for the installation of the product together with a complete schedule of changes in
the drawing and specifications, if any, which must be made in other work in order to permit the
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 0510- 7
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
use and installation of the proposed product in accordance with the recommendations of the
manufacturer of the product. Unless request for approval of other products have been received
and approvals have been published by addendum in accordance with the above procedure, the
successful bidder may furnish no products of any trade names, brand names, or manufacturer's
names except those designated in the contract documents.
F.
Any party who alleges that rejection of a submittal is a result of bias, prejudice, caprice, or error
on the Engineer may request a conference with a representative of the owner provided that the
request for said conference, submitted in writing, shall have reached the owner at least five
days prior to the date set for the opening of the bids, time being of the essence.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Hazardous Materials:
1. A/E's Responsibility: Plans and specifications have been prepared by the A/E for the
Owner without the A/E having conducted investigation as to the presence of asbestos or
hazardous waste on the project. Not being a part of this contract, the A/E has not charged
any fees and has not and will not advise the Owner with regard to the detection and/or
removal of asbestos or hazardous waste. The Owner is aware that asbestos or
hazardous waste could be present and will make all decisions with regard to its removal.
The removal of all hazardous materials and encapsulation of remaining surfaces is the
sole responsibility of the Owner.
2. If the Contractor observes the existence of a friable material which must be disturbed
during the course of his work, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner and the
Engineer. The Owner shall make all arrangements regarding testing and removal or
encapsulation of asbestos material if present. The Contractor shall not perform any work
pertinent to the friable material prior to receipt of special instructions from the Owner
through the Engineer.
3. "Friable Material" is any material which can be crumbled, pulverized or reduced to a
powder by hand pressure when dry.
B.
Asbestos (ACBM)
1. Specifications written for equipment and materials in this division of the specifications are
intended to eliminate any asbestos containing substance. The Contractor and his
suppliers are hereby notified that NO ASBESTOS CONTAINING PRODUCT IS
PERMITTED. If a product is listed in these specifications which contains asbestos, the
Contractor and his supplier shall so inform the Engineer immediately and shall not deliver
such product to the project site until additional written instructions are received.
2. Upon completion of construction, and prior to final inspection, the Contractor for work
performed under this division of the specifications shall be required to provide a certificate
to the Engineer in the following form:
CERTIFICATION FOR ASBESTOS CONTAINMENT
I/we ______________________________(Sub-Contractor), certify that there is no
asbestos contained in materials provided and/or installed by us
in_____________________________
______________________________(Project/Building).
WITNESS _______________(Notary Public)
DATE:_________________________
CONTRACTOR:_________________
______________________________
BY: __________________________
TITLE: ________________________
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 0510- 8
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Drawings are diagrammatic and show the general location of the equipment, raceway, and
equipment, but are not to be scaled. All dimensions shall be verified at the building site.
Prefabrication and/or installation of work from drawings shall be at the Contractor's risk. Refer
to Architectural plans for exact building dimensions and details.
B.
Space Conditions:
1. All apparatus shall fit into the available spaces in the building and must be introduced into
the building so as not to cause damage to the structure. Equipment larger than access to
equipment spaces shall be disassembled into sub-assemblies for installation.
2. Where deviations from the plans are required in order to conform to the space limitations,
such changes shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner and shall be subject to
approval.
3. All equipment requiring service shall be made accessible.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
All equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's published installation
instructions shipped with the equipment. In the event there is a discrepancy between these
specifications or Drawings and the manufacturer's instructions, no work shall be performed until
additional instructions are received.
B.
Route conduits and cable trays to avoid skylights, translucent, and transparent ceilings.
C.
Cutting and patching in connection with the installation shall be done by the trade whose work
is to be cut. The Contractor shall lay out and install his work ahead of the work of other trades
wherever possible.
D.
Seal sleeves and openings in exterior walls and mechanical room walls vaportight, watertight,
or for smoke/fire protection as applicable. Refer to Section 07 8400 - Firestopping.
E.
Record Drawings:
1. After completion, any changes in the location of conduits, the connections of circuits, or
any other changes from the contract documents shall be noted on a clean set of blue line
white prints and delivered to the Engineer before final acceptance of work.
3.04 INTERFACE WITH OTHER WORK
A.
General: No roughing shall be done until roughing drawings and exact electrical demand of
equipment is obtained. Notify the Engineer of any discrepancies.
B.
Mechanical:
1. Review Tabulated List of Power Wiring Requirements of all Mechanical Equipment
specified in Division 23 of the specifications. Conduit, conductor and breaker sizes shown
for mechanical equipment are based upon the best available information on the equipment
specified. The Contractor shall be allowed to provide electrical circuits compatible with the
proposed mechanical equipment where the mechanical equipment conforms to Division
26 of the specifications, but does not conform to the electrical criteria of these contract
documents . The Contractor shall submit the proposed electrical modifications to the
Engineer for review prior to roughing. No additional costs to the contract will be allowed for
these modifications.
2. Provide conduit, wiring, boxes, adaptors for equipment terminations and disconnect
switches. Provide power wiring through primary control device.
3. Starters, push-button stations, contactors, relays, limit and safety devices, and control
items are specified in Division 26 of the specifications (except as shown in Motor Control
Center). Unless otherwise noted, all starters shall be mounted between 24" and 80" above
finished floor. Push-button stations shall be mounted at switch height except as noted.
4. Owner Furnished Equipment: Provide conduit, wiring, boxes, adaptors for equipment
terminations, and disconnect switches. Make all connections indicated.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
5.
C.
26 0510- 9
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
The information shown on the plans is based upon the best available information. Before
performing any work on the site, the Contractor shall contact the utility company(s) serving
the facility and stake out all underground services. Notify the Engineer of any
discrepancies.
Site Utilities: The information shown on the plans is based upon the best information available.
Before performing any work on the site, the Contractor shall contact the utility company(s)
serving the facility and stake out all underground services. Notify the Engineer of any
discrepancies.
3.05 DEMONSTRATION, TRAINING AND INSTRUCTIONS
A.
Completion of Work:
1. At final observation a test shall be made and the entire system shall be shown to be in
working condition. The following shall be made available to personnel conducting the test:
a. Electrician with hand tools.
b. Accurate Voltmeter.
c. Clamp on Ammeter.
d. Test Lamp.
e. Phase Rotation Indicator.
f.
Complete Electrical Specifications and Drawings with all addenda and revisions.
g. Pre-final Punch List indicating disposition of all items with initials of person confirming
completion.
2. Before final observation or at final observation, the Contractor shall present the following
to the Engineer:
a. Finalized and corrected maintenance manuals.
b. Special systems certificates.
c. Record marked-up drawings.
d. Required test results.
3.06 CLEANING and PROTECTION
A.
All materials, equipment and electrical/telecommunications rooms shall be cleaned prior to
Final Observation.
B.
Remove any stored materials. Vacuum interiors of all panelboards, switchboards, switchgear,
transformers and any other electrical equipment.
C.
Paint equipment where finish has been damaged requiring retouching of finish to match factory
finish. Equipment which has been damaged beyond the point of retouching or has been
retouched not to match shall be repainted to match factory finish.
D.
Chipped or scraped paint shall be retouched to match original finish.
E.
All equipment shall be free of dust, rust and stains prior to substantial completion.
F.
During Construction: Conduit openings shall be closed with caps or plugs. All equipment shall
be covered and protected against water, dirt and chemical or mechanical injury. All equipment
and material shall be stored in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.07 FINISHING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL
A.
Use paint systems specified in Division 9 for the substrates to be finished.
B.
Paint conduit and electrical equipment in exposed, public areas per the Engineer's instructions.
C.
All ferrous fasteners and hanger supports not having a corrosion resistant plated finish shall be
painted to prevent rust.
D.
Paint all equipment, including that which is factory-finished, exposed to weather or to view on
the roof and outdoors.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 0510- 10
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.08 ATTIC STOCK
A.
Provide Attic Stock for the following items:
1. Lamps - 10% spare for each type used.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 0519- 1
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
SECTION 26 0519 - BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Single conductor building wire.
B.
Service entrance cable.
C.
Wire and cable for 600 volts and less.
D.
Wiring connectors.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
NECA 121 - Standard for Installing Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable (Type NM-B) and
Underground Feeder and Branch-Circuit Cable (Type UF); National Electrical Contractors
Association; 2007.
B.
NEMA WC 70 - Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical
Energy; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2009 (ANSI/NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95658).
C.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition
Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and
Supplements with 2009 Georgia State Amendments.
D.
UL 44 - Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
E.
UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
F.
UL 486A-486B - Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
G.
UL 486C - Splicing Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
H.
UL 854 - Service-Entrance Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 26 0510 - General Electrical Requirements for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide for each cable assembly type.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS
A.
Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and
product listing.
B.
Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise indicated,
permitted, or required.
C.
Underground feeder and branch-circuit cable is permitted only as follows:
1. Where not otherwise restricted, may be used:
a. For damp, wet, or corrosive locations as a substitute for NFPA 70, Type NMC
nonmetallic-sheathed cable, when nonmetallic-sheathed cable is permitted. In all
cases, transition to IMC where cable is to rise above grade and terminate in
disconnects or RV Pedastals.
2. In addition to other applicable restrictions, may not be used:
a. Where exposed to view.
b. Where exposed to damage.
D.
Service entrance cable is permitted only as follows:
1. May be used from the transformer to panel LDP2, 3, and 4:
a. For underground service entrance, installed in raceway.
E.
Metal-clad cable is not permitted.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 0519- 2
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
F.
Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire with Type THHN/THWN insulation in
raceway.
G.
Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire with Type THHN/THWN_ insulation in
raceway.
H.
Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire with Type THHN/THWN insulation in
raceway.
I.
Exterior Locations: Use only building wire with Type XHHW insulation in raceway. Direct bury
cable may be used in lieu of conduit.
J.
Under Slab on Grade Installations: Use only building wire with Type XHHW insulation in
raceway.
K.
For In Slab Installations: Use only building wire with Type XHHW insulation in raceway.
L.
Use solid conductor for feeder and branch circuits #10AWG and smaller.
M. Use stranded conductor for feeder and branch circuits #8 AWG and larger.
N.
Use stranded conductors for control circuits.
O.
Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.
P.
Use conductor not smaller than 16 AWG for control circuits.
Q.
Aluminum conductors may be used for circuits 100A and larger. All others are copper.
2.02 ALL CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A.
Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the
purpose indicated.
C.
Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring,
connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system.
D.
Comply with NEMA WC 70.
E.
Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83.
F.
Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44.
G.
Conductor Color Coding:
1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority having
jurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project.
2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation.
3. Color Code:
a. 240/120 V, 1 Phase, 3 Wire System:
1) Phase A: Black.
2) Phase B: Red.
3) Neutral/Grounded: White.
b. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green.
2.03 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE
A.
Manufacturers: conductors shall be manufactured in the USA.
B.
Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.
C.
Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
2.04 SERVICE ENTRANCE CABLE
A.
Service Entrance Cable for Underground Use: NFPA 70, Type USE single-conductor cable
listed and labeled as complying with UL 854, Type USE-2, and with UL 44, Type RHH/RHW-2.
B.
Conductor Stranding: Stranded.
C.
Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 0519- 3
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
2.05 WIRING CONNECTORS
A.
Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the
conductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C as
applicable.
2.06 LACING AND LUBRICANTS
A.
Lacing: wiring in cabinets, panels, pullboxes, junction boxes and electrical gear shall be laced
and held with one of the following:
1. T&B Ty-Raps
2. Fastway Wire Ties
3. Burndy Uni Raps
B.
Lubricants: Electro Y-ER-EAS, Ideal Yellow 77, or Minerallac #100.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.
B.
Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.
C.
Verify that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized to
accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70.
D.
Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported.
E.
Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
F.
Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and
cables.
B.
Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Circuiting Requirements:
1. Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic.
2. When circuit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing
required.
3. Arrange circuiting to minimize splices.
4. Circuiting Adjustments: Unless otherwise indicated, when branch circuits are shown as
separate, combining them together in a single raceway is permitted, under the following
conditions:
a. Provide no more than six current-carrying conductors in a single raceway. Dedicated
neutral conductors are considered current-carrying conductors.
5. Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise indicated, sharing of neutral/grounded conductors
among up to three single phase branch circuits of different phases installed in the same
raceway is not permitted. Provide dedicated neutral/grounded conductor for each
individual branch circuit.
B.
Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Install conductors and cable in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.
D.
Install underground feeder and branch-circuit cable (Type UF-B) in accordance with NECA 121.
E.
Installation in Raceway:
1. Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and other
contaminants.
2. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time.
3. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum
pulling tension and sidewall pressure.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
4.
26 0519- 4
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not
recommended by the manufacturer.
F.
Direct Burial Cable Installation:
1. Install cable with minimum cover of 18 inches unless otherwise indicated or required.
2. Protect cables from damage in accordance with NFPA 70.
G.
Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches of slack at each outlet.
H.
Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other equipment
enclosures.
I.
Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors.
1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or make
splices in conduit bodies or wiring gutters.
2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without
cutting, nicking or damaging conductors.
3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.
4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion,
oxides, and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces.
J.
Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for
the application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced
conductors.
K.
Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape.
L.
Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using
materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400.
M. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and
devices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system.
N.
Install wire and cable securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA-1.
O.
Use wiring methods indicated.
P.
Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire #4 AWG and larger, and for smaller sizes
where require to pull without conductor damage. Manufacturers include but are not limited to
Electro Y-ER-EAS, Ideal Yellow 77, Minerallac #100, or Polywater.
Q.
Pull all conductors into raceway at the same time.
R.
Do not pull wires until conduit system is complete.
S.
Raceway shall be continuous.
T.
Terminations and Equipment Connections: compression fittings shall be installed with the
manufacturer's recommended procedures and tools. Mechanical connections shall be torqued
utilizing the manufacturer's published torque requirements utilizing tools indicating torque
values for the device being tightened.
U.
Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire #4 AWG and larger.
V.
Protect exposed cable from damage.
W. All splices, taps and joints in exterior circuits shall be waterproofed by use of UL listed kits.
X.
Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.
Y.
Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.
Z.
All branch circuits (lighting and power) shall have a dedicated Neutral conductor. Shared
neutral conductors shall not be allowed.
AA. Conductors shall be continuous and unspliced between junction boxes, panels, or equipment
terminations.
AB. Provide manufacturer's compatible fittings meeting U.L. at boxes.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 0519- 5
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
3.04 SPLICES, TAPS, TERMINATIONS
A.
Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.
B.
Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible
temperature rise.
C.
Conductors #6 AWG and larger: Provide mechanical connectors containing pre-formed and
molded insulation designed with the connector as a system.
D.
Conductors #6 AWG and larger: provide Terminal Lugs. Anderson Versa-Crimp, Burndy
Hydent or T & B Color-Keyed.
E.
Conductors #6 AWG and larger: Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and
taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150
percent of insulation rating of conductor.
F.
Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and
taps, 8 AWG and smaller.
G.
Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps,
10 AWG and smaller.
1. Use Hi Bakelite wire connectors, 3M Skotchloks or Ideal Wing Nut. Conductors insulation
shall extend into the wire connector.
2. The connector shall be covered with vinyl plastic tape or with Raychem 600VAC
heatshrink insulation.
H.
Splices, taps and joints in exterior circuits shall be waterproofed by use of UL listed kits.
1. In damp or wet locations such as outside lighting, provide watertight conductor
connections.
2. Sealing system shall be flame-retardant heat shrinkable watertight seal with heat
activated sealants, Raychem or equal.
I.
Compression fittings shall be installed with the manufacturer's recommended procedures and
tools.
J.
Mechanical connections shall be torqued utilizing the manufacturer's published torque
requirements utilizing tools indicating torque values for the device being tightened.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 0526- 1
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 0526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Grounding and bonding components.
B.
Provide all components necessary to complete the grounding system(s) consisting of:
1. Metal underground water pipe.
2. Metal frame of the building.
3. Rod electrodes.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing.
B.
Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition
Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and
Supplements.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and grounding electrodes.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose
specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ELECTRODES
A.
Rod Electrodes: Copper-clad steel.
1. Diameter: 5/8 inch.
2. Length: 10 feet.
2.02 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES
A.
Exothermic Connections: Shall be used for all connections to rods. A compression connection
may be used so long as it is an IEEE 837-2002 approved connection method.
B.
Wire: Stranded copper.
C.
Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Bond all conduits and/or other conductor enclosures.
B.
Bond all panelboards, safety switches and non-current carrying, metal enclosures of fixed
equipment.
C.
Provide a minimum 2 AWG copper wire bond across the water meter, to be attached to ground
clamps on water line on each side of the meter.
D.
Provide a code size copper wire grounding electrode conductor in Schedule 40 PVC conduit
from the ground bus in the main building service disconnecting means (such as Main
Switchboard) to the line side of the main inside water valve and union, and to structural steel,
ground rods, and other metallic piping systems as per NEC.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
E.
26 0526- 2
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Provide bonding strap from neutral to ground inside the main service entrance equipment as
per the NEC and the Georgia State Electrical Code.
F.
Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve specified resistance to ground.
G.
In earth outdoors, install solid ground rods with the top at 12" below grade.
H.
Provide grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation footing .
Bond steel together.
I.
Provide a separate grounding conductor in all flexible conduit.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Active electrode shall achieve a maximum 5 ohms to ground.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 0529- 1
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 0529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Conduit and equipment supports.
B.
Anchors and fasteners.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition
Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and
Supplements.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose
specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.
Hangers, Supports, Anchors, and Fasteners - General: Corrosion-resistant materials of size
and type adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire in
conduit.
B.
Supports: Fabricated of structural steel or formed steel members; galvanized or painted. All
ferrous fasteners exposed to outside conditions and refrigerated spaces shall be coated with
corrosion resistant, plated finish to prevent rust.
C.
Anchors and Fasteners:
1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast inserts, expansion anchors, or preset inserts.
2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, steel spring clips, or welded fasteners.
3. Concrete Surfaces: Use expansion anchors.
4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts.
5. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors or preset inserts.
6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.
7. Wood Elements: Use wood screws.
D.
All ferrous fasteners exposed to outside conditions and refrigerated spaces shall be coated with
corrosion resistant, plated finish to prevent rust.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install hangers and supports as required to adequately and securely support electrical system
components, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.
1. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit.
2. Do not drill or cut structural members.
3. Hanger rods shall not extend more than 1" below the equipment or mounting bracket.
Trim any excess length.
B.
Rigidly weld support members or use hexagon-head bolts to present neat appearance with
adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts.
C.
Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. Provide a 3/4
inch fire resistant plywood backboard behind all surface-mounted panelboards, and as shown.
1. Anchor backboard to wall with 1/4-inch toggle bolts.
D.
In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1
inch off wall. Do not install plywood backboards in wet locations.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 0534- 1
CONDUIT
SECTION 26 0534 - CONDUIT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).
B.
Intermediate metal conduit (IMC).
C.
PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).
D.
Flexible metal conduit (FMC).
E.
Electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
F.
Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit.
G.
Conduit fittings.
H.
Conduit, fittings and conduit bodies.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 07 8400 - Firestopping.
B.
Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
C.
Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
D.
Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems.
E.
Section 26 0537 - Boxes.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI C80.6 - American National Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit (EIMC);
2005.
B.
NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and
Intermediate Metal Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2005.
C.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition
Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and
Supplements with 2009 Georgia State Amendments.
D.
UL 1 - Flexible Metal Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
E.
UL 6 - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
F.
UL 514B - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
G.
UL 651 - Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
H.
UL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
I.
UL 1242 - Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 26 0510 - General Electrical Requirements for submittal procedures.
B.
Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual routing of conduits larger than 2 inches,
as well as all underground conduit on the exterior.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for purpose
specified and shown.
1.06 ABBREVIATIONS
A.
GRS indicates galvanized rigid steel conduit also termed rigid steel conduit .
B.
RGS indicates galvanized rigid steel conduit also termed rigid steel conduit .
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 0534- 2
CONDUIT
C.
GRC indicates galvanized rigid steel conduit also termed rigid steel conduit .
D.
IMC indicates intermediate metal conduit whether made of galvanized steel or aluminum. See
Part 2 for specification.
E.
EMT indicates Electrical Metallic Tubing whether made of galvanized steel or aluminum. See
Part 2 for specification.
F.
PVC40 indicates PVC electrical conduit, schedule 40.
G.
PVC80 indicates PVC electrical conduit, schedule 80.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Receive, inspect, handle, and store conduit and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
B.
Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage.
C.
Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide
appropriate covering.
D.
Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS
A.
Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70
and product listing.
B.
Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the conduit types indicated
for the specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies, comply with the
most restrictive requirements. The details on the plans take precedence over the specifications.
Where conduit type for a particular application is not specified, use galvanized steel rigid metal
conduit.
C.
Underground:
1. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metal
conduit where emerging from underground.
D.
Concealed Within Masonry Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal
conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
E.
Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate
metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
F.
Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate
metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
G.
Interior, Damp or Wet Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal
conduit (IMC).
H.
Exposed, Interior, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit,
intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
I.
Exposed, Interior, Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or
intermediate metal conduit (IMC).
J.
Exposed, Exterior: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit
(IMC).
K.
Connections to Luminaires Above Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible metal conduit.
1. Maximum Length: 6 feet.
2.02 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system.
B.
Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) or
testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
C.
26 0534- 3
CONDUIT
Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable
minimum size requirements specified.
2.03 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)
A.
Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI
C80.1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.
B.
Fittings:
1. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled
as complying with UL 514B.
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
3. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and
compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted.
2.04 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC)
A.
Description: NFPA 70, Type IMC galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit complying with
ANSI C80.6 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 1242.
B.
Fittings:
1. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled
as complying with UL 514B.
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
3. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and
compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted.
C.
Conduit Size: Comply with NFPA 70.
1. Minimum Size: 1/2 inch unless otherwise specified.
D.
Underground Installations:
1. PVC may be used, or direct bury cable may be used. In all cases, transition to Rigid
conduit where cable rises above grade. All conduit that penetrates the slab shall be
RIGID. No PVC shall penetrate the slab.
E.
Outdoor Locations Above Grade: Use rigid metal conduit.
F.
Wet and Damp Locations: Use rigid metal conduit.
G.
Dry Locations:
1. Concealed: Use electrical metallic tubing where rigid conduit is not required by Paragraph
A above.
H.
Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) may be substituted for Rigid Steel conduit as allowed by the
National Electrical Code (NEC). All fittings shall be the same as for Rigid Steel conduit.
I.
Branch Circuits to Motors: Use rigid metal conduit for all branch circuits to motors. Isolate
actual motor connection from conduit system and from building with flexible conduit (liquidtight
if wet or damp location) not less than four diameters nor more than 24-inches in length.
2.05 METAL CONDUIT
A.
Rigid Metal Conduit.
B.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies: Material to match conduit. Fittings shall be malleable iron
threaded.
C.
Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) may be substituted for Rigid Steel conduit as allowed by the
National Electrical Code (NEC). All fittings shall be the same as for Rigid Steel conduit.
2.06 PVC-COATED GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)
A.
Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit with external polyvinyl
chloride (PVC) coating complying with NEMA RN 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL
6.
B.
Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), nominal thickness of 40 mil.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 0534- 4
CONDUIT
2.07 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC)
A.
Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC standard wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled
as complying with UL 1, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used.
B.
Fittings:
1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with
UL 514B.
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
C.
Description: Interlocked steel construction.
D.
Connectors: Provide Zinc or cadmium plated steel. Fittings anchoring conduit by means of set
screws are prohibited.
E.
B-X cable is prohibited.
F.
Provide separate grounding conductor inside flexible conduit.
G.
Flexible conduit shall be liquid-tight neoprene coated in damp & wet locations and for all motor
connections.
H.
Flexible conduit shall be minimum 1/2-inch nominal.
2.08 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A.
Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3
and listed and labeled as complying with UL 797.
B.
Fittings:
1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with
UL 514B.
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
3. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression (gland) or set-screw type.
a. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings.
C.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies: Steel set screw type.
2.09 RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUIT
A.
Description: NFPA 70, Type PVC rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit complying with NEMA TC 2
and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; Schedule 40 unless otherwise indicated,
Schedule 80 where subject to physical damage; rated for use with conductors rated 90 degrees
C.
B.
Fittings:
1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of conduit to be connected.
2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and listed and labeled as complying with
UL 651; material to match conduit.
C.
Description: Schedule 40 PVC.
D.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies: Material to match conduit.
1. The conduit, fittings, elbows and cement shall be produced by the same manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings.
B.
Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits.
C.
Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
D.
Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in.
E.
Conduit routing is shown on drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as
required to complete wiring system.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 0534- 5
CONDUIT
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install intermediate metal conduit (IMC) in accordance with NECA 101.
C.
Install PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) using only tools approved by the
manufacturer.
D.
Conduit Support:
1. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 0529 using
suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping,
ductwork, or other systems.
E.
Connections and Terminations:
1. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of galvanized
steel conduits prior to making connections.
2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-piece
couplings or split couplings. Do not use running threads.
3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another.
4. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock
nuts for dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations.
5. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protect
conductors.
6. Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and electrical
continuity.
F.
Penetrations:
1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and
grade beams, without approval of Structural Engineer.
2. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set
sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required.
4. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground.
5. Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first accessible point to
prevent entry of moisture and gases.
6. Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity of
membrane.
7. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using
materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400.
G.
Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansion
and expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connected
equipment. This includes, but is not limited to:
1. Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or deflection.
2. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost.
H.
Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential
substantial temperature differential, provide sealing fitting or approved sealing compound at an
accessible point near the penetration to prevent condensation. This includes, but is not limited
to:
1. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces.
2. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior spaces.
I.
Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.
3.03 CLEANING
A.
Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 0534- 6
CONDUIT
3.04 PROTECTION
A.
Immediately after installation of conduit, use suitable manufactured plugs to provide protection
from entry of moisture and foreign material and do not remove until ready for installation of
conductors.
B.
All line voltage conductors shall be placed in conduit unless otherwise noted. Direct buried
cable is acceptable outside of building foundations.
C.
All HVAC controls cabling specified in Section 23 0923 and Section 23 0913 shall be installed
in conduit unless specifically stated otherwise in those sections.
D.
All conduit shall be concealed unless otherwise noted.
E.
Circuits shall be homerun to panels as indicated. No consolidation of homeruns shall be
permitted.
F.
Metallic conduits in contact with ground, in gravel or sand fill, under and in slabs shall be
covered with two coats of asphaltic paint.
G.
Isolate all motor connections from building structure by installing liquid-tight flexible, nonmetallic
conduit not less than four diameters nor more than 24 inches in length. Install in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions. Support conduit per the National Electrical Code (NEC).
H.
Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
I.
Buried Conduit Exterior to Building:
1. Bury conduit minimum 18-inches in other areas except as noted.
2. Route conduit to avoid tree save areas, shrubs and decorative plants.
3. Route along parallel to water, sewer, or storm drainage lines, but not located in the same
ditch or trench.
4. Maintain 48-inches minimum horizontal spacing with water, sewer or storm drainage lines.
J.
Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps or clamps specifically designed for
the purpose.
K.
Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 26 0529.
Do not attach to other piping. Individual runs shall be anchored in place within three feet of
changes in direction and at intervals not over eight feet.
L.
Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary
supports.
M. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires or ceiling grid.
N.
Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
O.
Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls.
P.
Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.
Q.
Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point.
R.
Do not cross conduits in slab.
S.
Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104
degrees F.
T.
Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends.
U.
Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
V.
Join nonmetallic conduits using cement as recommended by manufacturer. All joints shall be
solvent welded in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Wipe nonmetallic conduit
dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting.
Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum. Bends in nonmetallic conduits shall conform to the
National Electrical Code.
W. Use conduit hubs to fasten conduit to cast boxes.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 0534- 7
CONDUIT
X.
Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to
make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one shot bender to fabricate
bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size.
Y.
Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.
Z.
Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses
seismic, control, and expansion joints.
AA. Provide insulated bushings on all conduits entering raceways, pullboxes, cabinets, outlet
boxes, panelboards, switchboards, switchgear and motor control centers, and at backboards
and stub-ups.
AB. Provide insulated throat connectors on all EMT connections and on EMT entering outlet boxes,
cabinets, panels, switchboards, switchgear and motor control centers, and at backboards and
stub-ups.
AC. Provide #16 galvanized pullwire or minimum 200 lb. polyolefin pull cord in each empty conduit
except sleeves and nipples.
AD. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
AE. Plugging: Seal all conduit runs which extend from interior to exterior of building and that enter
and leave refrigerated spaces, to prevent the circulation of air. Stuff conduit ends with duct seal
at nearest termination inside the building or outside refrigerated spaces. Sealant inside
refrigerated spaces shall be white permagum.
AF. Threads: Cut, clean and remove rough edges. Running threads shall not be used. Apply rust
inhibiting coating to all threads.
AG. Flexible metal conduit used to connect junction boxes to light fixtures shall not exceed 6 feet in
length. Support conduit per the National Electrical Code (NEC).
AH. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 26 0526.
AI. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 26 0553.
3.05 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A.
Penetration of fire rated walls, partitions, floors and ceilings: The contractor shall seal around all
raceway penetrating fire rated walls, partitions, floors, and ceilings. Contractor shall utilize UL
Listed material and shall install per UL Testing.
B.
Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 0537- 1
BOXES
SECTION 26 0537 - BOXES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Wall and ceiling outlet boxes.
B.
Pull and junction boxes.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition
Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and
Supplements.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 OUTLET BOXES
A.
Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported;
include 3/8 inch male fixture studs where required.
a. Boxes and covers shall not be less than 1/16 inch thick.
b. Box shall be anchored in place.
c. Unless otherwise specified, ceiling outlet boxes need not be provided with plaster
rings and shall be minimum two inches (2") deep. Boxes shall be provided with blank
covers.
d.
2. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type.
3. Switch and wall receptacles outlet boxes in plaster walls shall be four inches (4") square.
4. In exposed masonry or tile walls, four inch (4") square boxes with deep plaster covers
shall be used.
B.
Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast feralloy. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer.
Provide threaded hubs.
C.
Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 26 2726.
2.02 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A.
All pullboxes and junction boxes shall be sized in accordance with the National Electrical Code.
B.
Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
C.
Hinged Enclosures: As specified in Section 26 2716.
D.
Surface Mounted Exposed Boxes: Boxes shall be corrosion resistant cast iron in wet locations.
Use solid steel boxes with no knockouts in dry locations. Holes for raceways shall be drilled on
the job.
E.
Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat-flanged, surface mounted junction
box:
1. Material: Galvanized cast iron.
2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and galvanized steel cover/screws.
F.
In-Ground Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 6, outside flanged, recessed cover box for flush
mounting:
1. Material: Galvanized cast iron.
2. Cover: Nonskid cover with neoprene gasket and stainless steel cover screws.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install boxes securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 0537- 2
BOXES
B.
Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling,
equipment connections, and as required by NFPA 70.
C.
No more than one box extension shall be installed on any outlet or pull box. Larger boxes shall
be installed as required per NEC.
D.
Provide outlet boxes for lighting fixtures, wall switches, wall receptacles, telecommunications
equipment, protection equipment, antenna, and all equipment.
E.
Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for equipment connected under Section 26 2717.
F.
Unless otherwise indicated wall outlet boxes shall be placed with center lines at distances
above the finished floor (except at casework) as follows:
1. Convenience Outlets: 18"
2. Switches: 42"
3. Drinking Fountain Outlets: As recommended by manufacturer.
G.
The approximate locations of outlets are shown on the plans. The exact locations shall be
determined at the building. The right is reserved to change the exact location of any outlet a
maximum of 10 feet before it is permanently installed without additional cost.
H.
Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 26 2726.
I.
Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance.
J.
Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.
K.
Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling
access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.
L.
Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials
and methods specified.
M. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and
backsplashes.
N.
Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan.
O.
Where outlets are shown above cabinets and casework, the outlets shall be mounted so the
bottom of the device plates will be 1 to 3 inches above the backsplash.
1. Where outlets of different levels are shown adjacent, they shall be installed in one vertical
line. Outlets shown back to back on a common wall shall be offset a minimum of 10 inches
to dampen sound transmission through the wall. On all walls with 1 hour or greater fire
rating, "back to back" outlets shall be minimum 24 inches apart with a stud between
outlets for gypboard constructed partition.
2. Where the mounting height of an outlet is not shown on the plans or specifications, the
contractor shall contact the architect for exact mounting height requirements.
3. At locations where two or more devices are shown adjacent and at the same mounting
height, they shall be installed in one outlet box and covered with one face plate.
P.
Where outlets are installed in unfinished block or tile partitions, they shall be installed at the
points in the tile to permit the face plate to cover the rough opening. The horizontal and vertical
locations indicated may be altered to permit doing this. However, contractor shall check the
Architectural drawings to prevent conflicts when shifting location. Where outlets are shown back
to back on a common wall, they shall be offset 10" to avoid sound transmission.
Q.
Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.
R.
Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas.
S.
Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation.
Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls.
T.
Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for
surface finish thickness.
U.
Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.
V.
Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 0537- 3
BOXES
W. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.
X.
Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires.
Y.
Support boxes independently of conduit. Provide threaded rods, screws, bolts, toggle bolts,
etc. for support. Do not use clips or other hardware to attach boxes to ceiling grids.
Z.
Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.
AA. Use two gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
AB. Use cast outlet boxes in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations.
AC. Use cast outlet boxes for all surface mount box installations in Mechanical Rooms.
3.02 CLEANING
A.
Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.
B.
Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 0553- 1
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Electrical identification requirements.
B.
Identification nameplates and labels.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Identification for Equipment:
1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control
equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components.
a. Panelboards:
1) Identify ampere rating.
2) Identify voltage and phase.
3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight
of equipment.
4) Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s) served for panelboards with a
door. Identify spares and spaces using pencil.
b. Enclosed switches, circuit breakers, and motor controllers:
1) Identify voltage and phase.
2) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight
of equipment.
2. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels: Use warning labels to identify arc flash hazards for
electrical equipment, such as switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, meter
socket enclosures, and motor control centers that are likely to require examination,
adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized.
a. Minimum Size: 3.5 by 5 inches.
b. Legend: Include orange header that reads "WARNING", followed by the word
message "Arc Flash and Shock Hazard; Appropriate PPE Required; Do not operate
controls or open covers without appropriate personal protection equipment; Failure to
comply may result in injury or death; Refer to NFPA 70E for minimum PPE
requirements" or approved equivalent.
2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Brady Corp.
B.
Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com.
C.
HellermannTyton.
2.03 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
A.
Identification Labels:
1. Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and
abrasion resistant.
2. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten text unless
otherwise indicated.
B.
Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, white letters on black background for
normal power.
C.
Locations:
1. Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure, including but not limited to all
panelboards, disconnect switches, switchboards, starters, contactors, and circuit breakers
in Main Panel.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
D.
26 0553- 2
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Letter Size:
1. Use 1/4 inch letters for identifying individual equipment designation and voltages.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturer's instructions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing, and
maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows:
1. Surface-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front.
C.
Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified.
D.
Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no bubbles or
wrinkles and edges properly sealed.
E.
Mark all handwritten text, where permitted, to be neat and legible.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 2416- 1
PANELBOARDS
SECTION 26 2416 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Lighting and appliance panelboards.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
B.
Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
C.
Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service; Federal
Specification; Revision D, 2006.
B.
NECA 407 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards; National Electrical
Contractors Association; 2009.
C.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2008.
D.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition
Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and
Supplements.
E.
UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
F.
UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
G.
UL 67 - Panelboards; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
H.
UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker
Enclosures; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 26 0510 - General Electrical Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity,
integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker arrangement and sizes.
C.
Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of panelboards and actual
installed circuiting arrangements.
1.05 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A.
Furnish two of each panelboard key.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Eaton Electrical/Cutler-Hammer; Model ______: www.eatonelectrical.com.
B.
GE Industrial; Model ______: www.geindustrial.com.
C.
Square D; Model ______: www.squared.com.
2.02 ALL PANELBOARDS
A.
Provide products listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the
purpose indicated.
B.
Short Circuit Current Rating:
1. Listed series ratings are acceptable only where specifically indicated.
C.
Mains: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the
installation.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 2416- 2
PANELBOARDS
D.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Replaceable without disturbing adjacent devices.
E.
Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 67 temperature rise requirements.
1. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each panelboard, with a suitable lug for
each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
F.
Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.
G.
Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E.
1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the
following installation locations:
2. Boxes: Galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated.
a. Provide wiring gutters sized to accommodate the conductors to be installed.
3. Fronts:
a. Fronts for Surface-Mounted Enclosures: Same dimensions as boxes.
4. Lockable Doors: All locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated.
H.
Future Provisions: Prepare all unused spaces for future installation of devices including
bussing, connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions.
2.03 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS
A.
Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch circuit
type, circuit breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings,
configurations and features as indicated on the drawings.
B.
Conductor Terminations:
1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only.
2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical.
C.
Bussing:
1. Phase Bus Connections: Arranged for sequential phasing of overcurrent protective
devices.
2. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Copper.
3. Ground Bus Material: Copper.
D.
Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic bolt-on type unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Enclosures:
1. Provide surface-mounted enclosures as indicated.
2. Provide clear plastic circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door.
F.
Manufacturers: Square D, General Electric, Cutler-Hammer, ITE/Siemens Allis.
G.
Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, factory assembled lighting and appliance branch
circuit panelboard.
H.
Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard,
bonded to panel enclosure; provide insulated ground bus where scheduled.
I.
Bus Assembly Arrangement: Distribution phase sequence type vertically numbered so that odd
numbered single poles and spaces are located on the left. No two single poles or spaces,
vertically, shall be connected to the same phase. All current carrying parts shall be plated. See
schedules for special arrangements.
J.
Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating:
1. 208/240 Volt Panelboards: 35000 amperes rms symmetrical.
2. Series rating is permitted. Manufacturer shall certify in writing that all series elements
have been tested and approved for the application by U.L. This certification shall be
included with the submittals.
K.
Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, bolt-on type, quick-make,
quick-break, ambient compensated with common trip handle for all poles; UL listed.
1. Type SWD for lighting circuits.
2. Type HACR for air conditioning equipment circuits.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
3.
4.
5.
L.
26 2416- 3
PANELBOARDS
Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled.
Do not use tandem circuit breakers.
All load side connections of the same breaker shall be in the same gutter for multi-pole
breakers.
Current Limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers: With integral thermal and instantaneous
magnetic trip in each pole, coordinated with automatically resetting current limiting elements in
each pole; UL listed. Interrupting rating 100,000 symmetrical amperes, let-through current and
energy level less than permitted for same size Class RK-5 fuse.
M. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1.
1. Provide with code size side and end gutters, 4 inch minimum.
2. Enclosure shall be constructed of galvanized code gauge steel.
3. Boxes shall NOT be furnished with concentric knockouts pre-punched by the
manufacturer.
N.
Cabinet Box: 6 inches deep, 20 inches wide for 240 volt and less panelboards, 20 inches wide
for 480 volt panelboards.
O.
Cabinet Front: Flush cabinet front with adjustable, concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge,
metal directory frame, and flush lock all keyed alike. Directory cover shall be glass or clear
plastic. Finish with rust inhibiting prime coat and manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
2.04 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A.
Molded Case Circuit Breakers:
1. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating circuit
breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS W-C-375
where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.
2. Interrupting Capacity:
a. Series Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers listed in combination with upstream
devices to provide interrupting rating not less than the short circuit current rating
indicated.
3. Conductor Terminations:
a. Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only.
4. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time tripping
element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for short
circuit protection.
5. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install panelboards securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1
(general workmanship), NECA 407 (panelboards), and NEMA PB 1.1.
C.
Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and NFPA 70.
D.
Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 0529.
E.
Install panelboards plumb.
F.
Mount panelboards such that the highest position of any operating handle for circuit breakers or
switches does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform.
G.
Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.
H.
Install all field-installed branch devices, components, and accessories.
I.
Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1 and the NECA Standard of Installation.
J.
Install panelboards plumb. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 2416- 4
PANELBOARDS
K.
Height: 6 feet to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 feet with bottom no more
than 4 inches above floor.
L.
Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in panelboards.
M. Provide computer-generated circuit directory for each lighting and appliance panelboard and
each power distribution panelboard provided with a door, clearly and specifically indicating the
loads served. Identify spares and spaces.
N.
Provide identification nameplate for each panelboard in accordance with Section 26 0553.
O.
Provide arc flash warning labels in accordance with NFPA 70.
P.
Provide spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to an accessible location above
ceiling. Identify each as SPARE.
1. Minimum spare conduits: 3 empty 3/4 inch.
Q.
Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 26 0526.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 01 4000.
B.
Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS, except Section 4.
C.
Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective panelboards or associated components.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended
torque settings.
B.
Adjust alignment of panelboard fronts.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean dirt and debris from panelboard enclosures and components according to manufacturer's
instructions.
B.
Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 2701- 1
ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE
SECTION 26 2701 - ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Service Requirements
B.
Service Voltage Verification
C.
Meter bases.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
System Characteristics: 120/240 volts, single phase, three-wire, 60 Hertz.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform work in accordance with utility company written requirements and NFPA 70.
B.
Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose
specified and indicated.
1.04 COORDINATION
A.
Services: Secondary service raceway and conductors by contractor. Transformer and primary
service shall be provided by the Utility Company. The Contractor shall provide underground
raceway and conductors to transformer as shown. Contractor shall provide any conduit required
for the meter base.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 COMPONENTS
A.
Meter Base: Rated 200 amperes continuous duty with the following features:
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Arrange with utility company to obtain permanent electric service to the Project.
B.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated on utility company drawings.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Contractor is responsible for all items required for metering connections.
B.
Contractor shall provide underground raceway and conductors to transformer as shown.
C.
Install securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.
D.
Contractor shall seal all service entrance conduits to prevent water entry. Seal conduits at the
pole mount transformers and inside the switchboard/switchgear.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 2726- 1
WIRING DEVICES
SECTION 26 2726 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Wall switches.
B.
Receptacles.
C.
Wall plates.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 26 0537 - Boxes.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
FS W-C-596 - Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for; Federal Specification;
Revision G, 2001.
B.
FS W-S-896 - Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush-mounted (General Specification);
Federal Specification; Revision F, 1999.
C.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition
Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and
Supplements with 2009 Georgia State Amendments.
D.
UL 20 - General-Use Snap Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
E.
UL 498 - Attachment Plugs and Receptacles; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
F.
UL 514D - Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
G.
UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordination:
1. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installed
under other sections or by others.
2. Coordinate wiring device ratings and configurations with the electrical requirements of
actual equipment to be installed.
3. Coordinate the installation and preparation of uneven surfaces, such as split face block, to
provide suitable surface for installation of wiring devices.
4. Notify the Engineer of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain
direction prior to proceeding with work.
B.
Sequencing:
1. Do not install wiring devices until final surface finishes and painting are complete.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 26 0510 - General Electrical Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and
configurations.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL:
A.
Different type devices shall match in color. Receptacles, light switches, low voltage switches,
wall mounted occupancy sensors, etc shall be the same color with the same type of trim or
cover. Provide submittals data indicating this color prior to purchasing.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 2726- 2
WIRING DEVICES
2.02 APPLICATIONS
A.
Provide weather resistant GFI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for all
receptacles installed outdoors or in damp or wet locations.
B.
Provide GFI protection for all receptacles installed within 6 feet of sinks.
C.
Unless noted otherwise, do not use combination switch/receptacle devices.
2.03 Manufacturers: Cooper, Hubbell, Leviton, P&S (See below for model numbers.)
2.04 WALL SWITCHES
A.
All Wall Switches: AC only, quiet operating, general-use snap switches with silver alloy
contacts, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 20
and where applicable, FS W-S-896; types as indicated on the drawings.
1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding clamp for
back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.
B.
Lighted Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with illuminated standard
toggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts; illuminated with load off; single pole single
throw or three way as indicated on the drawings. All light switches shall be lighted type unless
noted otherwise.
C.
Wall Switches: Heavy Duty, AC only general-use snap switch, complying with NEMA WD 6 and
WD 1.
1. Body and Handle: ivory plastic with toggle handle.
2. Ratings:
a. Voltage: 120 - 277 volts, AC.
b. Current: 20 amperes .
D.
Switch Types: Single pole, 3-way, pilot gang, and locator,.
1. Single Pole Switches:
a. Cooper 2221
b. Hubbell HBL1221
c. Leviton 1221-2
d. P&S PS20AC1
2. 3-Way Switches:
a. Cooper 2223
b. Hubbell HBL1223
c. Leviton 1223-2
d. P&S PS20AC3
3. Pilot Gang :
a. Cooper 2221PL
b. Hubbell HBL1221PL
c. Leviton 1221-PL
d. P&S PS20AC1-RPL7
2.05 RECEPTACLES
A.
All Receptacles: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as
complying with UL 498, and where applicable, FS W-C-596; types as indicated on the
drawings.
1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding clamp for
back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.
2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6.
B.
GFI Receptacles:
1. All GFI Receptacles: Provide with feed-through protection, light to indicate ground fault
tripped condition and loss of protection, and list as complying with UL 943, class A.
a. Provide test and reset buttons of same color as device.
2. Standard GFI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 520R, rectangular decorator style.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
3.
26 2726- 3
WIRING DEVICES
Weather Resistant GFI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V,
NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as weather resistant type
complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations.
C.
Receptacles: Heavy duty, complying with NEMA WD 6 and WD 1.
1. Device Body: ivory plastic.
2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as specified and indicated.
D.
Convenience Receptacles: Type 5 - 20.
E.
Outlet Types:
1. Duplex Convenience Receptacles.
a. Cooper 5362
b. Hubbell HBL5362
c. Leviton 5362
d. P&S 5362-A
2. GFCI Receptacles: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to
meet regulatory requirements. Devices shall be UL943 Compliant.
a. Cooper XGF20
b. Hubbell GF5362
c. Leviton 8898
d. P&S 2095
2.06 WALL PLATES
A.
All Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D.
1. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types of corresponding wiring
devices.
2. Size: Oversized; stainless steel.
3. Screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish.
B.
Stainless Steel Wall Plates: Brushed satin finish, Type 302 stainless steel.
C.
Weatherproof Covers for Wet Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with hinged lockable cover
and corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations while in use with
attachment plugs connected.
D.
General:
1. Size: Plates shall be jumbo size, except as noted on plans or specified herein.
2. Finish: Satin Stainless Steel, except as noted on plans or specified herein.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
B.
Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are
properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.
C.
Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.
D.
Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.
E.
Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to
wiring devices.
F.
Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
B.
Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 2726- 4
WIRING DEVICES
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where
applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless
otherwise indicated.
B.
Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1, including
mounting heights specified in that standard unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0537 as required for installation
of wiring devices provided under this section.
1. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows:
a. Wall Switches: 48 inches above finished floor.
b. Receptacles: 18 inches above finished floor or 6 inches above counter.
D.
Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E.
Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent
devices exceeds 300 V.
F.
Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches long. Do not
connect more than one conductor to wiring device terminals.
G.
Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal and
tightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push-in
pressure terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated binding.
H.
Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit
equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.
I.
Provide GFI receptacles with integral GFI protection at each location indicated. Do not use
feed-through wiring to protect downstream devices.
J.
Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation."
K.
Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place.
L.
Install wall switches with OFF position down.
M. Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on top and horizontally mounted
receptacles with grounding pole on left.
N.
Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely
covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or
improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this
requirement.
O.
Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed
or designated for future use.
P.
Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom.
Q.
Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
R.
Install wall plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets.
S.
Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal.
T.
Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls.
U.
Install plates with all edges in contact with the finished wall.
V.
Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above
accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets.
W. Mount all plates vertically unless otherwise noted.
X.
Where two or more devices are shown adjacent, they shall be mounted in ganged boxes and
covered with one faceplate.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 2726- 5
WIRING DEVICES
Y.
Where outlets of different levels are shown adjacent, they shall be installed in one vertical line.
Outlets shown back to back on a common wall shall be offset a minimum of 10 inches to
dampen sound transmission through the wall.
Z.
On all walls with 1 hour or greater fire rating, "back to back" outlets shall be installed a minimum
of 24 inches apart. Mount with stud between outlets for gypboard constructed partitions.
AA. Where outlets are installed in unfinished block or tile partitions they shall be installed at the
points in the tile to permit the face plate to cover the rough opening. The horizontal and vertical
locations indicated may be altered to permit above installation. Contractor shall check the
Architectural drawings to prevent conflicts when shifting locations.
AB. Provide GFI receptacles where located within 6' of a water source, and as shown on plans.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects.
B.
Operate each wall switch with circuit energized to verify proper operation.
C.
Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation.
D.
Verify that each receptacle device is energized.
E.
Test each receptacle device for proper polarity prior to final inspection.
F.
Test each GFCI receptacle for proper tripping operation according to manufacturer's
instructions.
G.
Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
3.06 CLEANING
A.
Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match
original factory finish.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 2817- 1
ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SECTION 26 2817 - ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Enclosed circuit breakers.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
B.
Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
C.
Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service; Federal
Specification; Revision D, 2006.
B.
NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical
Contractors Association; 2010.
C.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2008.
D.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition
Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and
Supplements with 2009 Georgia State Amendments.
E.
UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
F.
UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
G.
UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker
Enclosures; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordination:
1. Coordinate work with other trades. Avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or
other potential obstructions within dedicated equipment spaces and within working
clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.
2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance
requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.
3. Notify the Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 26 0510 - General Electrical Requirements for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing ratings, trip units, time current curves,
dimensions, and enclosure details.
C.
Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of enclosed circuit breakers.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURES: General Electric, Square D, Cutler-Hammer, ITE/Siemens Allis.
2.02 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A.
Description: Units consisting of molded case circuit breakers individually mounted in
enclosures.
B.
Provide products listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the
purpose indicated.
C.
Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.
D.
Provide thermal magnetic circuit breakers unless otherwise indicated.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 2817- 2
ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
E.
Provide insulated, groundable fully rated solid neutral assembly where a neutral connection is
required, with a suitable lug for terminating each neutral conductor.
F.
Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each enclosed circuit breaker, with a suitable
lug for terminating each equipment grounding conductor.
G.
Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E.
1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the
following installation locations:
a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1.
b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.
2. Finish for Painted Steel Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard, factory applied grey unless
otherwise indicated.
3. Provide surface-mounted enclosures unless otherwise indicated.
H.
Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position.
2.03 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A.
Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating circuit
breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS W-C-375 where
applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.
B.
Interrupting Capacity:
1. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short circuit
current rating indicated, but not less than:
a. 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 240 VAC or 208 VAC.
2. Series Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers listed in combination with upstream
devices to provide interrupting rating not less than the short circuit current rating indicated.
C.
Conductor Terminations:
1. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors.
D.
Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time tripping
element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for short circuit
protection.
E.
Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1.
1. Enclosure shall be NEMA 1 rated for indoor applications and NEMA 3R where exposed to
weather.
2. Provide with non-teasible, positive, quick-make, quick-break mechanisms.
3. Minimum interrupting capacity (UL and NEMA) shall match that of the next panelboard
upstream.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Enclosures: NEMA AB 1, Type 1.
1. Fabricate enclosures from steel.
2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish, gray color.
B.
Handle Lock: Include provisions for padlocking.
C.
Provide grounding lug in each enclosure.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install enclosed circuit breakers where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
B.
Install enclosed circuit breakers securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance
with NECA 1.
C.
Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and NFPA 70.
D.
Install enclosed circuit breakers plumb. Provide supports in accordance with Section 26 0529.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 2817- 3
ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
E.
Install enclosed circuit breakers plumb.
F.
Except where indicated to be mounted adjacent to the equipment they supply, mount enclosed
circuit breakers such that the highest position of the operating handle does not exceed 79
inches above the floor or working platform.
G.
Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.
H.
Provide identification nameplates for each enclosed circuit breaker in accordance with Section
26 0553.
3.02 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended
torque settings.
3.03 CLEANING
A.
Clean dirt and debris from circuit breaker enclosures and components according to
manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 5100- 1
INTERIOR LIGHTING
SECTION 26 5100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Interior luminaires.
B.
Ballasts.
C.
Fluorescent emergency power supply units.
D.
Lamps.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI C82.11 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts - High Frequency Fluorescent
Lamp Ballasts - Supplements; Consolidated-2002.
B.
NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical
Contractors Association; 2010.
C.
NECA/IESNA 500 - Standard for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems; National
Electrical Contractors Association; 2006.
D.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition
Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and
Supplements.
E.
NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire
Protection Association; March 9, 2010.
F.
UL 924 - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
G.
UL 935 - Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordination:
1. Coordinate the installation of luminaires with mounting surfaces installed under other
sections or by others. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc.
required for mounting. Coordinate compatibility of luminaires and associated trims with
mounting surfaces at installed locations.
2. Coordinate the placement of luminaires with structural members, ductwork, piping,
equipment, diffusers, fire suppression system components, and other potential conflicts
installed under other sections or by others.
3. Notify the Engineer of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain
direction prior to proceeding with work.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 26 0510 - General Electrical Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data.
C.
Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for the Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. Extra Lamps: Ten percent of total quantity installed for each type, but not less than two of
each type.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 LUMINAIRES
A.
Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 5100- 2
INTERIOR LIGHTING
B.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets,
ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and
protect the lamp and distribute the light.
C.
Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring,
connectors, hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating
system.
D.
Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any
damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.
E.
Fluorescent Luminaires:
1. Provide ballast disconnecting means complying with NFPA 70 where required.
2. Fluorescent Luminaires Controlled by Occupancy Sensors: Provide programmed start
ballasts.
2.02 LUMINAIRES
A.
Furnish products as indicated in this Schedule and as included on the Drawings.
1. Surface and recessed luminaires shall be constructed of not less than 22 gauge die
formed, embossed or ribbed steel with enclosed ballast and wiring compartments.
2. Metals shall be treated to provide a permanent bonded surface resistant to corrosion.
Painted surfaces shall be finished with baked enamel having a reflectance value of at
least 85 percent.
B.
All recessed lighting fixtures shall have internal thermal protection in accordance with the
Underwriters' Laboratory listing criteria for the ceiling system in which the fixtures are being
installed.
C.
Each luminaire shall bear the label of Underwriter's Laboratories (UL).
D.
The contractor shall verify all voltages to fixtures and shall furnish fixtures, ballasts, etc.
compatible with voltages from panels serving fixtures.
E.
Metals shall be treated to provide a permanent bonded surface resistant to corrosion. Painted
surfaces shall be finished with baked enamel having a reflectance value of at least 85%.
F.
For fluorescent fixtures used in classrooms, media centers, and instructional areas:
1. Overall fixture efficiency shall be a minimum of 55% of bare lamp output.
2. Brightness shall be measured using specified lamps.
3. Bare lamps shall not be visible above the 45 degree viewing angle, crosswise or
lengthwise.
4. Minimum Visual Comfort Probability (VCP) for all fixtures located in classroom type
instructional areas and media centers shall be 70%.
G.
Manufacturers names and series are shown to indicate the general type fixture and quality.
The functional and material criteria of the specifications for the fixture "types" shall take
precedence and no fixture shall be provided which does not comply with the criteria. Listing of
a manufacturer does NOT constitute a waiver of ANY of the functional and material criteria.
2.03 BALLASTS
A.
All Ballasts:
1. Provide ballasts containing no polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs).
2. Minimum Efficiency/Efficacy: Provide ballasts complying with all current applicable federal
and state ballast efficiency/efficacy standards.
B.
Fluorescent Ballasts:
1. All Fluorescent Ballasts: Unless otherwise indicated, provide high frequency electronic
ballasts complying with ANSI C82.11 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 935.
a. Input Voltage: Suitable for operation at voltage of connected source, with variation
tolerance of plus or minus 10 percent.
b. Total Harmonic Distortion: Not greater than 20 percent.
c. Power Factor: Not less than 0.95.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 5100- 3
INTERIOR LIGHTING
d.
2.
Ballast Factor: Normal ballast factor between 0.85 and 1.15, unless otherwise
indicated.
e. Thermal Protection: Listed and labeled as UL Class P, with automatic reset for
integral thermal protectors.
f.
Sound Rating: Class A, suitable for average ambient noise level of 20 to 24 decibels.
g. Lamp Compatibility: Specifically designed for use with the specified lamp, with no
visible flicker.
h. Provide automatic restart capability to restart replaced lamp(s) without requiring
resetting of power.
i.
Ballast Marking: Include wiring diagrams with lamp connections.
Non-Dimming Fluorescent Ballasts:
a. Lamp Starting Method:
1) T8 Lamp Ballasts: Programmed start unless otherwise indicated.
b. Lamp Starting Temperature: Capable of starting standard lamp(s) at a minimum of 0
degrees F, and energy saving lamp(s) at a minimum of 60 degrees F unless
otherwise indicated.
2.04 FLUORESCENT EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY UNITS
A.
Description: Self-contained fluorescent emergency power supply units suitable for use with
indicated luminaires, complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and
listed and labeled as complying with UL 924.
B.
Compatibility:
1. Ballasts: Compatible with electronic, standard magnetic, energy saving, and dimming AC
ballasts, including those with end of lamp life shutdown circuits.
C.
Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source, solid-state control automatically switches
connected lamp(s) to the fluorescent emergency power supply for minimum of 90 minutes of
rated emergency illumination, and automatically recharges battery upon restoration of normal
power source.
D.
Diagnostics: Provide accessible and visible multi-chromatic combination test switch/indicator
light to display charge, test, and diagnostic status and to manually activate emergency
operation.
E.
All recessed lighting fixtures shall have internal thermal protection in accordance with the
Underwriters' Laboratory listing criteria for the ceiling system in which the fixtures are being
installed.
F.
Fluorescent Lamp Emergency Power Supply: Emergency battery power supply suitable for
installation in ballast compartment of fluorescent fixture.
1. Self-contained emergency lighting unit shall provide automatic illumination of lamps for a
minimum of 90 minutes emergency service upon failure or interruption of normal power.
Unit shall be U.L. Listed. Housing shall be constructed of 18-gauge steel and finished with
corrosion-resistant beige enamel. Emergency power source shall be a 12-volt
rechargeable, maintainable, Nickel-Cadmium battery. Electronics shall be of digital solid
state design and include low-voltage battery disconnect, short circuit and thermal
protection, a constant voltage transformer, a full-wave voltage and current regulator with
maximum 8-amp charge current and light emitting diodes that indicate operation or charge
mode. Unit shall be rated 120/277 volt, 60 Hz. Controls shall include a test switch, L.E.D.
"Power On" indicator and red "Fast Charge" indicators. Unit shall provide MINIMUM 1100
lumen output for a single lamp for the above listed time span.
2. Manufacturers: Emergi-Lite, Bodine, Dual-Lite, Chloride/Exide, Lithonia, Cooper-SureLite.
2.05 LAMPS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. GE Lighting: www.gelighting.com.
2. Philips Lighting Co of NA: www.lighting.philips.com.
3. Sylvania
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 5100- 4
INTERIOR LIGHTING
B.
All Lamps:
1. Unless explicitly excluded, provide new, compatible, operable lamps in each luminaire.
2. Verify compatibility of specified lamps with luminaires to be installed. Where lamps are not
specified, provide lamps per luminaire manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Minimum Efficiency: Provide lamps complying with all current applicable federal and state
lamp efficiency standards.
4. Color Temperature Consistency: Unless otherwise indicated, for each type of lamp
furnish products which are consistent in perceived color temperature. Replace lamps that
are determined by the Engineer to be inconsistent in perceived color temperature.
C.
General: Provide for all fixtures. Fixtures shall be left clean and lamps burning at final
inspection. All metal halide and mercury vapor lamps shall be equipped with self extinguishing
mechanisms to extinguish the arc if the outer globe is broken.
D.
Compact Fluorescent: Lamps as noted elsewhere, minimum color rendering index of 82, 3500K
color temperature.
E.
Fluorescent Lamps:
1. T-8 Fluorescent Lamps: All 24-inch, 36-inch, 48-inch, and 96-inch lamps shall be T8
fluorescent lamps, nominally 32 watts with 2950 minimum initial lumens for the 48 inch
lamps, minimum color rendering index of 82, 3000K color temperature. Lamps shall be
low mercury content with less than 10 milligrams of mercury per 48-inch lamp.
2. Manufacturers: General Electric, Phillips, Osram/Sylvania, ITT.
F.
All recessed lighting fixtures shall have internal thermal protection in accordance with the
Underwriters' Laboratory listing criteria for the ceiling system in which the fixtures are being
installed.
G.
The contractor shall verify all voltages to fixtures and shall furnish fixtures, ballasts, etc.
compatible with voltages from panels serving fixtures.
H.
Reflector Lamps: Beam patterns in accordance with ANSI C78.379.
1. Manufacturers: General Electric, Phillips, Osram/Sylvania, ITT.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0537 as required for installation
of luminaires provided under this section.
B.
Install products according to manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1 (general
workmanship), NECA 500 (commercial lighting), and NECA 502 (industrial lighting).
D.
Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent
luminaires.
E.
Recessed Luminaires:
1. Install trims tight to mounting surface with no visible light leakage.
2. Non-IC Rated Luminaires: Maintain required separation from insulation and combustible
materials according to listing.
F.
Install fixtures securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 500 and 502.
G.
The contractor shall verify all voltages to fixtures and shall furnish fixtures, ballasts, etc.
compatible with voltages from the panelboards serving the fixtures.
H.
Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan.
I.
Suspension: The contractor shall verify all ceiling types and configuration prior to ordering
fixtures and shall furnish fixtures compatible with the ceilings being installed. Mounting
information shown on the lighting fixture schedule is based upon the best information available
during design, but must be verified by the contractor upon receipt of ceiling submittals and
modifications made to assure ceiling/light fixture compatibility.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
1.
2.
3.
26 5100- 5
INTERIOR LIGHTING
Surface Fluorescent and Recessed HID: Support from structural system with two 3/8-inch
threaded rods unless otherwise noted. Use nut and locknut to secure fixture. For fixtures
not connected with flexible conduit, the contractor shall verify exact location of fixture
knockouts and wireway prior to roughing outlet box.
Recessed Flanged Troffers in Hard Ceilings: Support from structural system with two 3/8inch threaded rods except where the suspended ceiling system includes a suspended
structural channel support system to which fixture attached channel clamps may be
attached.
Locating Light Fixtures in Mechanical Equipment Spaces: The contractor shall adjust
lighting fixture locations to avoid conflicts between fixtures, ducts, pipes, and equipment.
Locate light fixtures below and clear of ducts, pipes and equipment, but fixtures shall not
be mounted less than 7 feet above the finished floor, nor more than 12 feet above the
floor. Suspend fixtures via 1/4" threaded rod from each end of fixture.
J.
Structural System Attachments:
1. Poured-in Place Concrete or Precast Solid Masonry: Concrete expandable anchors unless
otherwise noted.
2. Steel Bar Joists or Steel Beams: 1 5/8-inch x 3/4-inch x 12 gauge channel bolted to top
chords. Drill channel and secure threaded rod to channel with nut and locknut unless
otherwise noted.
3. Along Bar Joist or Steel Beam Center Line: F & M Fig. 255, Grinnell Fig. 88, or Elcen Fig.
29 beam clamps unless otherwise noted.
K.
Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below.
L.
Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory
requirements for fire rating.
M. Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaires in place.
N.
Install wall mounted luminaires at height as indicated on Drawings. Request this information
prior to rough in if no information is given.
O.
Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
P.
Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for
temperature conditions within fixture; use flexible conduit.
Q.
Connect luminaires and emergency lighting units to branch circuit outlets provided under
Section 26 0537 as indicated.
R.
Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for
temperature conditions within luminaire.
S.
Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
T.
Emergency Lighting Units:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit feeding
normal lighting in same room or area. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting
controls.
U.
Fluorescent Emergency Power Supply Units:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit feeding
normal ballast(s) in luminaire. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting controls.
V.
Install lamps in each luminaire.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect each product for damage and defects.
B.
Operate each fixture after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and
operation.
C.
Test self-powered exit signs, emergency lighting units, and fluorescent emergency power
supply units to verify proper operation upon loss of normal power supply.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
D.
26 5100- 6
INTERIOR LIGHTING
Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or
replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by the Engineer.
3.03 CLEANING
A.
Clean surfaces according to NECA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA 502 (industrial lighting),
and manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and
restore finishes to match original factory finish.
B.
Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials.
C.
Remove dirt and debris from enclosures.
D.
Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
E.
Clean finishes and touch up damage.
3.04 PROTECTION
A.
Relamp luminaires that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion.
3.05 SCHEDULE - See Drawings
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
26 5200- 1
SENSOR LIGHTING CONTROLS
SECTION 26 5200 - SENSOR LIGHTING CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Occupancy Sensors.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2011.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
The objective of this section is to ensure the proper installation of the occupancy sensor based
lighting control system so that lighting is turned off automatically after reasonable time delay
when a room or area is vacated by the last person to occupy said room or area.
B.
Set the factory default to Auto OFF at 20 minutes.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 26 0510 - General Electrical Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide product data sheets for all equipment to be used. Provide circuit
diagrams of each type of device. Circuit diagrams shall indicate type of control wire and/or line
voltage wire used.
C.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of installed sensors and controls.
Drawings shall include location of all power packs and low voltage wiring.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform work in accordance with NFPA 70.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section, with not less than five years of documented experience.
C.
All products shall be from the same manufacturer.
D.
All components shall be U.L. listed.
E.
Products shall be manufactured by an ISO 9002 certified manufacturing facility.
1.07 WORK INCLUDED
A.
The the Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, tools, appliances, control hardware,
sensors, wiring, junction boxes and equipment necessary for and incidental to the delivery,
installation and furnishing of a completely operational occupancy sensor lighting control
system, as shown on the plans and as described herein.
B.
The the Contractor shall coordinate all work described in this section with all other applicable
plans and specifications, including but not limited to wiring, conduit, luminaires, HVAC systems
and building management systems.
1.08 WARRANTY
A.
Provide five year manufacturer warranty for all components.
B.
Any equipment found to be damaged, defective or non-conforming shall be replaced at no
additional cost to the owner.
1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Supply two additional power packs and one additional sensor of each type used for the Owner's
use in maintenance of project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Occupancy Sensors:
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
26 5200- 2
SENSOR LIGHTING CONTROLS
The WattStopper
Mytech
Leviton
Hubbell
Pass & Seymour
Lutron
Lightolier
Novitas
Lithonia
2.02 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A.
NOTE: 360 degree sensors are typically shown in the center of the space on the plans. Where
ceiling mounted sensors are shown in the corners of spaces, these sensors should not be 360
degree, rather they should be designed for corner-room operation. The contractor and
manufacturer shall coordinate this requirement and shall not provide a single type sensor for all
applications. The plans show the type (infrared, ultrasonic, or combination) only. The location in
the space should provide guidance as to the exact product to be chosen. Where sensors are to
be mounted in the ceiling above 15 ft, use high density lenses to maintain sensitivity.
B.
Note: Ceiling mounted occupancy sensors shall be white.
C.
The passive infrared sensors shall be capable of detecting presence, in the control area, by
detecting changes in the Infrared energy. Small movements shall be detected such as when a
person is writing while seated at a desk.
D.
All sensors shall have readily accessible, user adjustable settings for time delay and sensitivity.
Settings shall be located on the sensor (not the control unit) and shall be recessed to limit
tampering.
E.
Wall switch sensors shall be capable of detection of occupancy at desktop level up to 300
square feet, and gross motion up to 1000 square feet.
F.
Wall switch sensors shall accommodate loads from 0 to 800 watts at 120 volts; 0 to 1200 watts
at 277 volts and shall have a 180 degree coverage capability.
G.
Wall switch sensors shall include means of protecting the internal relay from the effects of
inrush current.
H.
Wall switch sensors shall have no leakage current to load, in manual or in Auto/Off mode for
safety purposes and shall have voltage drop protection.
I.
If an open circuit occurs in the AC line (such as a ballast or lamp failure), the sensor shall
automatically switch to OFF mode.
J.
In the event of a sensor failure, a bypass manual override shall be provided on each sensor.
When bypass is utilized, lighting shall remain ON constantly or control shall divert to a wall
switch until sensor is replaced. This control shall be recessed to prevent tampering.
K.
Passive infrared sensors shall have a multiple segmented Fresnel lens, in a multiple-tier
configuration, with grooves-in to eliminate dust and residue build-up. The lens shall filter short
wavelength IR such as those emitted by the sun and other visible light sources.
L.
Ultrasonic sensing shall utilize Advanced Signal Processing to adjust the detection threshold
dynamically to compensate for constantly changing levels of activity and airflow throughout
controlled space.
M. Ultrasonic operating frequency shall be crystal controlled to within plus or minus 0.01%
tolerance to assure reliable performance and eliminate sensor cross-talk. Sensors using
multiple frequencies are not acceptable.
N.
Dual technology sensors shall consist of passive infrared and ultrasonic technologies for
occupancy detection. Products that react to noise or ambient sound will not be considered.
O.
For dual technology sensors, detection verification of BOTH technologies must occur in order to
activate lighting systems. Upon verification, detection by either shall hold lighting on.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
P.
26 5200- 3
SENSOR LIGHTING CONTROLS
Dual technology sensors shall have a retrigger feature in which detection by either technology
shall retrigger the lighting system on within 5 seconds of being switched off.
Q.
All sensors used in the center of a space shall provide for 360 degrees of coverage.
R.
To avoid false ON activations and to provide high sensitivity to minor motion, Pulse Count
Processing and Detection Signature Analysis shall be used to examine the frequency, duration,
and amplitude of a signal, to respond only to those signals caused by human motion.
S.
Sensor shall incorporate field-selectable logic configurations which allows for space utilization
changes and/or other special field conditions.
T.
Where specified, passive infrared and dual technology sensors shall offer daylighting foot
candle adjustment control and be able to accommodate dual level lighting.
U.
All sensors shall be capable of operating normally with electronic ballasts, PL lamp systems
and rated motor loads.
V.
Coverage of sensors shall remain constant after sensitivity control has been set. No automatic
reduction shall occur in coverage due to the cycling of air conditioner or heating fans.
W. All sensors shall provide an LED as a visual means of indication at all times to verify that
motion is being detected during both testing and normal operation.
X.
Power packs for sensors shall have an internal, additional isolated relay with Normally Open,
Normally Closed and Common outputs for use with HVAC control Sensors utilizing separate
components or specially modified units to achieve this function are not acceptable. Make the
connection to the fans shown on the plans such that when the light is on, the fans are on.
2.03 CIRCUIT CONTROL HARDWARE (POWER PACKS)
A.
Control units shall be capable of external mounting through a 1/2" knock-out on a standard
electrical enclosure. Unit shall be rated for plenum installation.
B.
The control unit shall be an integrated, self-contained unit consisting internally of an isolated
load switching control relay and a transformer to power the sensor.
C.
Each control unit shall be capable of powering a minimum of two occupancy sensors.
D.
Relay contacts shall have ratings of:
1. 13A - 120 VAC Tungsten
2. 20A - 120 VAC Ballast
3. 20A - 277 VAC Ballast
E.
Control wiring between sensors and control units shall be Class II, 18-24 AWG, stranded U.L.
Classified, PVC insulated or TEFLON jacketed cable suitable for use in plenums.
F.
Minimum acceptable wire gauge from the circuit control hardware relays shall be #14 AWG.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Locate and aim sensors to provide complete and proper volumetric coverage within the
manufacturer's specified range of coverage.
C.
Spaces shall have 90% - 100% coverage to completely cover the controlled area,
accommodating all occupancy habits of single or multiple occupants at any location within the
room(s).
D.
The location of sensors shown on the plans are diagrammatic only. Locate sensors to avoid
interference with possible obstructions.
E.
Locate sensors a minimum of 6 feet from and HVAC supply diffuser or return grille.
F.
Provide all power/switch packs required to make the system fully functional. Usually, a
minimum of one power/switch pack is required per circuit and/or area of control. However in
some cases additional power/switch packs may be required. Contact manufacturer for final
determination of power/switch packs required for this project.
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-11034.00
G.
26 5200- 4
SENSOR LIGHTING CONTROLS
Locate power/switch packs on wall above ceiling directly over the standard wall switch where
possible.
END OF SECTION
Reed Bingham State Park
Large Comfort Station Replacement
LDD-111034.00
31 3116 - 1
TERMITE CONTROL
SECTION 31 3116
TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Chemical soil treatment.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
Title 7, United States Code, 136 through 136y - Federal Insecticide, Fungicide and Rodenticide
Act; United States Code; 1947 (Revised 2001).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Indicate toxicants to be used, composition by percentage, dilution schedule,
intended application rate.
B.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that toxicants meet or exceed specified requirements.
C.
Warranty: Submit warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.
Toxicant Chemical: EPA approved; synthetically color dyed to permit visual identification of
treated soil.
B.
Diluent: Recommended by toxicant manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
3.02 APPLICATION
A.
Comply with requirements of U.S. EPA and applicable state and local codes.
B.
Spray apply toxicant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Apply toxicant at following locations:
1. Under Slabs-on-Grade.
2. At Both Sides of Foundation Surface.
D.
Under slabs, apply toxicant immediately prior to installation of vapor barrier.
E.
At foundation walls, apply toxicant immediately prior to finish grading work outside foundations.
F.
Apply extra treatment to structure penetration surfaces such as pipe or ducts, and soil
penetrations such as grounding rods or posts.
G.
Re-treat disturbed treated soil with same toxicant as original treatment.
H.
If inspection or testing identifies the presence of termites, re-treat soil and re-test.
3.03 PROTECTION
END OF SECTION